Samsung Multixpress Clx 8540nd User Manual

CLX-8540ND Series  
Multi Functional Printer  
User’s Guide  
imagine the possibilities  
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.  
CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE  
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products,  
contact the Samsung customer care center.  
Country  
JAMAICA  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
1-800-234-7267  
www.samsung.com/  
Country  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
ARGENTINE  
AUSTRALIA  
AUSTRIA  
0800-333-3733  
1300 362 603  
JAPAN  
0120-327-527  
8000-7267  
LATVIA  
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € www.samsung.com/at  
0.07/min)  
LITHUANIA  
LUXEMBURG  
MALAYSIA  
MEXICO  
8-800-77777  
02 261 03 710  
1800-88-9999  
BELGIUM  
02 201 2418  
www.samsung.com/be  
www.samsung.com/  
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-  
BRAZIL  
0800-124-421  
4004-0000  
7267864) (€ 0,10/min)  
NEW ZEALAND  
NICARAGUA  
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726  
786)  
CANADA  
CHILE  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/ca  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
00-1800-5077267  
www.samsung.com/  
CHINA  
800-810-5858  
400-810-5858  
010-6475 1880  
NORWAY  
PANAMA  
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)  
800-7267  
www.samsung.com/  
COLOMBIA  
01-8000112112  
0-800-507-7267  
COSTA RICA  
www.samsung.com/  
PHILIPPINES  
1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
CZECH  
REPUBLIC  
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz  
Samsung Zrt., eská organiza ní složka, Oasis Florenc,  
Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8  
1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-  
7864)  
02-5805777  
č
č
DENMARK  
ECUADOR  
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)  
1-800-10-7267  
POLAND  
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678)  
022-607-93-33  
www.samsung.com/  
PORTUGAL  
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/pt  
EL SALVADOR 800-6225  
www.samsung.com/  
PUERTO RICO  
1-800-682-3180  
www.samsung.com/  
ESTONIA  
800-7267  
REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676  
www.samsung.com/  
KAZAKHSTAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
www.samsung.com/  
EIRE  
0818 717 100  
KYRGYZSTAN  
FINLAND  
00-800-500-55-500  
30-6227 515  
RUSSIA  
8-800-555-55-55  
SINGAPORE  
SLOVAKIA  
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
FRANCE  
01 4863 0000  
GERMANY  
01805 - SAMSUNG (726-  
7864 € 0,14/min)  
SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
SPAIN  
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172  
678)  
GUATEMALA  
HONDURAS  
1-800-299-0013  
800-7919267  
3698-4698  
www.samsung.com/  
SWEDEN  
075-SAMSUNG (726 78 64)  
www.samsung.com/  
SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,  
CHF 0.08/min)  
HONG KONG  
HUNGARY  
INDIA  
TADJIKISTAN  
TAIWAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
0800-329-999  
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu  
3030 8282  
1800 110011  
1800 3000 8282  
THAILAND  
1800-29-3232  
02-689-3232  
TRINIDAD &  
TOBAGO  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/  
INDONESIA  
ITALIA  
0800-112-8888  
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)  
Country  
TURKEY  
Customer Care Center  
444 77 11  
Web Site  
U.A.E  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
8000-4726  
U.K  
0845 SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)  
8-800-502-0000  
U.S.A  
UKRAINE  
UZBEKISTAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
www.samsung.com/  
VENEZUELA  
VIETNAM  
0-800-100-5303  
1 800 588 889  
www.samsung.com/  
CONTENTS  
Machine Setup button ....................................................................................................................................... 1.6  
Job Status button .............................................................................................................................................. 1.6  
Power Saver button ........................................................................................................................................... 1.7  
Interrupt button .................................................................................................................................................. 1.7  
Understanding the Status LED ............................................................................................................................... 1.7  
Status ................................................................................................................................................................. 1.7  
Machine Setup button ....................................................................................................................................... 1.8  
Job Status button .............................................................................................................................................. 1.8  
Basic tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 5.1  
Advanced tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.1  
Image tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 5.2  
Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex) ...................................................................................................... 5.3  
Basic tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.2  
Advanced tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 6.2  
Image tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 6.3  
Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial) ............................................................................................................ 6.4  
Duplex ................................................................................................................................................................ 6.7  
Resolution ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.7  
Original Type ..................................................................................................................................................... 6.8  
Darkness ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.8  
Erase Background ............................................................................................................................................ 6.8  
Color Mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 6.8  
Storing individual phone numbers (Speed No.) ................................................................................................. 6.8  
Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.) ............................................................................................................ 6.9  
Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru™ Web Service ........................................................................... 6.9  
Polling from a remote Mailbox ......................................................................................................................... 6.11  
Using Mailbox ....................................................................................................................................................... 6.11  
Creating Mailbox .............................................................................................................................................. 6.11  
Storing originals in Mailbox .............................................................................................................................. 6.12  
Faxing to a remote Mailbox ............................................................................................................................. 6.12  
Understanding the Scan screen ............................................................................................................................. 7.1  
Options tab ........................................................................................................................................................ 7.2  
Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email) ............................................................................. 7.3  
Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP (Scan to Server) ........................................................................... 7.7  
Duplex ................................................................................................................................................................ 7.8  
Resolution ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.8  
Original Size ...................................................................................................................................................... 7.8  
Original Type ..................................................................................................................................................... 7.8  
Color Mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 7.9  
Darkness ............................................................................................................................................................ 7.9  
Erase Background ............................................................................................................................................ 7.9  
Scan to Edge ..................................................................................................................................................... 7.9  
Quality ................................................................................................................................................................ 7.9  
Scan Preset ....................................................................................................................................................... 7.9  
File Format ...................................................................................................................................................... 7.10  
Scan to USB ........................................................................................................................................................... 9.2  
Basic tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 9.2  
Advanced tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 9.2  
Image tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 9.3  
Output tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 9.3  
Duplex ................................................................................................................................................................ 9.3  
Resolution ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.3  
Original Size ...................................................................................................................................................... 9.4  
Original Type ..................................................................................................................................................... 9.4  
Color Mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 9.4  
Darkness ............................................................................................................................................................ 9.4  
Erase Background ............................................................................................................................................ 9.5  
Scan to Edge ..................................................................................................................................................... 9.5  
Quality ................................................................................................................................................................ 9.5  
Scan Preset ....................................................................................................................................................... 9.5  
File Format ........................................................................................................................................................ 9.5  
File Policy .......................................................................................................................................................... 9.6  
Understanding the Document Box screen ........................................................................................................... 10.1  
About Standard Workflow ................................................................................................................................... 11.1  
Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen ................................................................................................... 11.1  
Machine Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 12.1  
Machine Status screen .................................................................................................................................... 12.1  
Admin Setting screen ...................................................................................................................................... 12.1  
Copy Setup .......................................................................................................................................................... 12.5  
Fax Setup ............................................................................................................................................................. 12.5  
Security ................................................................................................................................................................ 12.7  
Access Control ............................................................................................................................................... 12.8  
Log ........................................................................................................................................................ 12.11  
Change Admin. Password ........................................................................................................................... 12.11  
Information Hiding ............................................................................................................................... 12.11  
Document Box Management ............................................................................................................................ 12.14  
Standard Workflow Management ..................................................................................................................... 12.14  
Checking Document Box ..................................................................................................................................... 13.2  
To access SyncThru™ Web Service: ............................................................................................................. 13.9  
About this user’s guide  
Finding more information  
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the  
machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual  
usage. Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for  
installing and using the machine.  
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the  
following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.  
Quick Install  
Guide  
Provides information on setting up your  
machine and this requires that you follow  
the instructions in the guide to prepare the  
machine.  
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:  
• Document is synonymous with original.  
• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.  
The following table offers the conventions of this guide:  
Convention  
Description  
Example  
Copy Setup  
Bold  
Used for texts on the  
screen or actual prints on  
the machine.  
User’s Guide  
Provides you with step-by-step instructions  
for using your machine’s full features, and  
contains information for maintaining your  
machine, troubleshooting, and installing  
accessories.  
Note  
Note  
Used to provide  
The date format  
may differ from  
country to country.  
additional information or  
detailed specification of  
the machine function and  
feature.  
This user’s guide also contains Software  
section to provide you with information on  
how to print documents with your machine  
in various operating systems, and how to  
use the included software utilities.  
Caution  
Caution  
Used to give users  
information to protect the  
machine from possible  
mechanical damage or  
malfunction.  
Do not touch the  
green underside of  
the toner cartridge.  
TM  
SyncThru Web Admin Service:  
Downloadable  
Softwares  
convenient for network administrators  
who need to manage many machines  
a. pages per minute  
Footnote  
Used to provide more  
detailed information on  
certain words or a  
phrase.  
(http://solution.samsungprinter.com)  
Samsung AnyWeb Print: helps  
personal users to screen-capture the  
website screen in Windows Internet  
Copy > the Advanced tab >  
Clone Copy  
>
Used to show the steps  
of selecting or pressing  
items in order.  
The example means;  
press Copy from the  
Main screen, press the  
Advanced tab, and then  
press Clone Copy.  
(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/  
personal/anywebprint)  
Samsung Easy Color Manager: helps  
Samsung color laser printer users to  
adjust color as they like.  
personal/colormanager)  
Printer Driver  
Help  
Provides you with help information on printer  
driver properties and instructions for setting  
up the properties for printing. To access a  
printer driver help screen, click Help from  
the printer properties dialog box.  
(See  
Used to guide users to  
the reference page for  
the additional detailed  
information.  
(See page 1.1 for Special  
features.)  
page 1.1  
for Special  
features.)  
Note  
• Items, features, options on the touch screen may differ  
between models depending on their configurations.  
Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get  
help, support, printer drivers, manuals,  
• The paper capacity in this user’s guide is based on 75 g/  
m (20 lb) plain paper, capacity for 80 g/m (20 lb) is mentioned  
2
2
and order information from the Samsung  
i
   
14 Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions.  
Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and may  
require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the  
machine to normal operation.  
Safety and Regulatory Information  
Important Precautions and Safety Information  
15 Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a  
remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the AC  
power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.  
When using this machine, these basic safety precautions should always be  
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people:  
1
2
3
Read and understand all instructions.  
16 The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe  
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with 110 V  
Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.  
a
machine, then it should be 16 AWG or bigger.  
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the  
literature accompanying the machine.  
*
17 Use only No.26 AWG or larger telephone line cord.  
4
If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information,  
heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the  
operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your  
sales or service representative for assistance.  
18 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
Laser Safety Statement  
5
Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack  
before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only a damp  
cloth for cleaning.  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21  
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is  
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system  
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser  
radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or  
prescribed service condition.  
6
7
8
9
Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall,  
causing serious damage.  
Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator,  
heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.  
WARNING  
Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine  
where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.  
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from  
Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can  
damage your eyes.  
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish  
performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.  
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be  
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:  
10 Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface  
cords.  
11 Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or  
cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points, creating a  
risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the  
machine.  
12 To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine.  
Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.  
Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or  
other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the  
unit is subsequently used.  
13 Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and  
refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following  
conditions:  
• When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is  
damaged or frayed.  
• If liquid has been spilled into the machine.  
• If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.  
• If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been  
followed.  
• If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.  
• If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.  
a AWG: American Wire Gauge  
ii  
 
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates  
that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with  
other household waste at the end of their working life.  
Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate  
that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above  
the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly  
disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the  
environment.  
Ozone Safety  
Power Saver  
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone.  
The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the  
operator. However, it is advisable that the machine be  
operated in a well ventilated area.  
If you need additional information about ozone, please  
request your nearest Samsung dealer.  
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate  
batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free  
battery return system.  
This printer contains advanced energy conservation  
technology that reduces power consumption when it is  
not in active use.  
Radio Frequency Emissions  
When the printer does not receive data for an extended  
period of time, power consumption is automatically  
lowered.  
FCC Information to the User  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to  
the following two conditions:  
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are  
registered U.S. marks.  
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
• This device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are  
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or  
more of the following measures:  
Recycling  
Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this  
product in an environmentally responsible manner.  
Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical  
& Electronic Equipment)  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
(Applicable in the European Union and other European  
countries with separate collection systems)  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
This marking on the product, accessories or literature  
indicates that the product and its electronic accessories  
(e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed  
of with other household waste at the end of their working  
life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human  
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate  
these items from other types of waste and recycle them  
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.  
• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.  
Caution:  
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer  
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the  
equipment.  
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations  
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this  
product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they  
can take these items for environmentally safe recycling.  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise  
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing  
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry  
and Science Canada.  
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and  
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic  
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques  
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme  
sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par  
l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.  
Correct disposal of batteries in this product  
(Applicable in the European Union and other European  
countries with separate battery return systems.)  
iii  
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal  
Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules  
and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.  
Fax Branding  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any  
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via  
a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a  
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of  
the transmission the following information:  
You should also know that:  
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.  
• If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone  
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception  
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other  
equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your  
machine.  
(1) the date and time of transmission  
(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the  
message; and  
(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business  
entity or individual.  
• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we  
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the  
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or  
telephone and electronic specialty stores.  
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,  
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably  
required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules  
and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected  
to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone  
company communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of  
such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or  
• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to  
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the  
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give  
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.  
performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow  
the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.  
• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.  
• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by  
means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.  
Ringer Equivalence Number  
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this  
machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the  
machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the  
telephone company.  
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)  
Important  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load  
placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have  
“overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same  
telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls,  
especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence  
Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in  
order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases,  
a sum of five may not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone  
equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from  
your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network.  
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp  
plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you  
must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover.  
If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another  
fuse cover.  
Please contact the people from you purchased the machine.  
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be  
suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13  
amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove  
the moulded plug.  
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the  
requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the left side of this equipment is  
a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the  
format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided  
to the telephone company.  
Warning  
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.  
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you  
plug it into a socket.  
WARNING:  
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not  
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to  
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to  
the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the customer  
that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the  
company may temporarily cease service, providing that they:  
Important warning: You must earth this machine.  
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:  
• Green and Yellow:  
• Blue:  
Earth  
Neutral  
Live  
• Brown:  
a) promptly notify the customer.  
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do  
the following:  
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.  
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter  
“E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.  
iv  
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N”  
or colored black.  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software  
must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes  
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL  
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”  
or colored red.  
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.  
Declaration of Conformity (European Countries)  
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be  
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software  
without  
5. prior written permission. For written permission, please contact  
6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"  
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written  
permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following  
acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the  
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://  
www.openssl.org/)"  
Approvals and Certifications  
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes  
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity  
with the following applicable 93/68/EEC Directives of the  
European Union as of the dates indicated:  
Hereby, Samsung Electronics declare that this product is in compliance  
with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive  
1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at  
www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and  
enter your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.  
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 73/23/EEC Approximation of the laws of  
the member states related to low voltage equipment.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS''  
AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO  
EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER  
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING  
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 89/336/EEC (92/31/EEC), approximation  
of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.  
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and  
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their  
conformity.  
A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards  
can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative.  
EC Certification  
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE  
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGE.  
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications  
Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)  
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric  
Young([email protected]). This product includes software written by  
Tim Hudson ([email protected]).  
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European  
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone  
network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has  
been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the  
European countries:  
Original SSLeay License  
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights  
reserved.  
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.  
The product has been tested against TS 103 021. To assist in the use and  
application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the  
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an  
advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional  
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TS 103 021 terminals. The  
product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the  
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.  
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young  
([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform  
with Netscapes SSL.  
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as  
the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to  
all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc.,  
code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this  
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the  
holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric  
Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be  
removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be  
given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can  
be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in  
OpenSSL License  
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are  
met:  
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.  
v
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are  
met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this  
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software  
must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes  
cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])"  
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library  
being used are not cryptographic related:-).  
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof)  
from the apps directory (application code) you must include an  
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim  
Hudson ([email protected])"  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF  
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER  
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN  
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE  
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGE.  
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or  
derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be  
copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU  
Public Licence.]  
vi  
Save time and money  
You can print multiple pages on one single sheet of  
1Introduction  
paper to save paper.  
You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain  
paper. See Software section.  
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product. Your  
machine provides printing, copying, scanning, and faxing functions.  
• This machine automatically conserves electricity by  
substantially reducing power consumption when not in  
use.  
This chapter includes:  
Expand your machine’s capacity  
Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their  
memory. (Page 16.1)  
• A network interface enables network printing. Your  
machine comes with a built-in network interface, 10/  
100/1000 Base TX.  
• Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript 3  
Emulation* (PS) enables PS printing.  
Note  
Some features are optional. Please check the specifications  
sections. (Page 17.1)  
* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3  
© Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. All rights  
reserved. Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and  
OneImage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation.  
Special features  
* 136 PS3 fonts  
Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc.  
Your new machine is equipped with special features.  
Print with excellent quality and speed  
Print in various environments  
You can print in full range of colors using yellow,  
You can print with various operating system such as  
Windows, Linux and Macintosh systems.  
Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a  
network interface.  
magenta, cyan, and black.  
You can print with a resolution of up to 9,600 x 600 dpi  
effective output (600 x 600 x 4 dpi). See Software  
section.  
Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 38 ppm  
and letter-sized paper at up to 40 ppm.  
• For duplex printing, your machine prints A4-sized  
paper at up to 33 ppm and letter-sized paper at up to  
35 ppm  
Copy originals in several formats  
You can create a booklet using sequential 2-sided  
document production.  
• There are special functions to erase punch holes,  
staple marks and newspaper background.  
• The print quality and image size may be adjusted and  
enhance at the same time.  
Handle different paper options with flexibility  
• The multi-purpose tray supports letterhead, envelopes,  
labels, transparencies, custom-sized media, postcards,  
and heavy paper. The multi-purpose tray holds up to  
100 sheets of plain paper.  
• The 520-sheet tray 1 and 520-sheet optional tray  
support plain paper in various sizes.  
• The 2,100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper  
in various sizes.  
Scan the originals and send it right away  
• Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations  
using, E-mail, SMB, FTP or Networks scanning.  
• Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email  
addresses and send the scanned image immediately.  
• Scan in color and use the precise compressions of  
JPEG, TIFF and PDF formats.  
Create professional documents  
• Print watermarks. You can customize your documents  
with words, such as “Confidential”. See Software  
section.  
Set a specific time to transmit a Fax (Optional)  
You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and  
also send the fax to several stored destinations.  
• After the transmission, the machine may print out the  
fax reports according to the setting.  
• Print posters. The text and pictures of each page of  
your document are magnified and printed across the  
sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form  
a poster. See Software section.  
1.1  
<
Introduction>  
   
Use USB flash memory devices  
If you have a USB memory device, you can use it in  
various ways with your machine.  
You can scan documents and save them to the device.  
You can directly print data stored to the device.  
You can back up data and restore backup files to the  
machine’s memory.  
IPv6  
This machine supports IPv6.  
Machine features  
The table below lists a general overview of features supported by your  
machine.  
a
( : Included, O: Optional )  
Features  
CLX-8540ND  
USB 2.0  
 
 
 
USB Memory  
PostScript Emulation  
DADF (Duplex Automatic  
Document Feeder)  
 
Hard Disk  
 
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
 
Fax option kit  
Optional tray 2/3  
High Capacity Feeder  
Stand  
Stacker & Stapler (Finisher)  
Staple Cartridge  
FDI (Foreign Device Interface) kit  
SmarThru Workflow  
Network Interface  
(Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX)  
a
Duplex printing  
 
O
4-Bin Mailbox  
2-Bin Finisher  
O
a. Printing on both sides of paper.  
a.For ordering information for optionals. (Page 15.1)  
1.2  
<Introduction>  
           
Machine overview  
These are the main components of your machine.  
Front view  
• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.  
*
2
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
DADF cover  
Stand  
DADF document width guides  
DADF document input tray  
DADF document output tray  
Scanner lid  
CCD Lock  
3
Output support  
4
Multi-purpose tray extension  
Multi-purpose tray paper width guides  
Scanner glass  
5
6
Control panel  
7
Side cover  
Image transfer unit  
Toner cartridge  
8
Front cover  
9
Multi-purpose tray  
Tray 1  
Imaging unit  
10  
11  
Waste toner container  
*
Optional tray  
1.3  
<Introduction>  
                             
Rear view  
• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.  
*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Finisher (Stacker & Stapler)  
USB port  
*
Finisher output tray (Stacker & Stapler)  
Network port  
*
*
9
Finisher cover (Stacker & Stapler)  
Dummy for FDI (Foreign Device Interface)  
*
10  
11  
12  
USB memory port  
15-pin Finisher connection (Stacker & Stapler)  
Power switch  
*
Extension telephone socket (EXT)  
*
Telephone line socket (LINE)  
Power receptacle  
1.4  
<Introduction>  
             
Control panel overview  
1
2
3
4
8
9
Machine Setup: Leads you to the machine setup and  
advanced settings. (Page 12.1)  
On Hook Dial: Engages the telephone line.  
Job Status: Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs  
or completed jobs.  
Interrupt: Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.  
10  
11  
Status: Shows the status of your machine. (Page 1.7)  
Clear All: Reverts the current settings to the default  
values.  
Display screen: Displays the current machine status and  
prompts during an operation. You can set menus easily  
using the touch screen.  
Power Saver: Sends the machine into the power saver  
mode. You can also turn the power on and off with this  
button. (Page 3.6)  
5
12  
13  
Numeric keypad: Dials fax number, and enters the number  
value for document copies or other options.  
Stop: Stops an operation at any time. The pop up window  
appears on the screen showing the current job that the  
user can stop or resume.  
6
7
Clear: Deletes characters in the edit area.  
Start: Starts a job.  
Redial/Pause: In standby mode, redials the last number, or  
in edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.  
Caution  
When you use the touch screen, use your finger only. The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or anything else.  
1.5  
<Introduction>  
                         
Note  
Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons  
• Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be  
grayed out, depending on the optional kit or program installed  
in your machine.  
Touch screen  
The touch screen allows for user-friendly operation of the machine. Once  
To switch the display screen and see other available icons,  
press the right arrow on the display screen.  
you press the home icon (  
) on the screen, it shows the Main screen.  
Machine Setup button  
When you press Machine Setup button, you can browse current  
machine settings or change machine values. (Page 12.1)  
: Shows Help. You can find the explanation by feature contents.  
Copy: Enters the Copy menu.  
Fax: Enters the Fax menu. (Optional)  
Documents Box: Enters the Documents Box menu. (Page 13.2)  
USB: When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on  
your machine, USB icon will not be grayed out. (Page 9.1)  
This button allows you to move to menus on the Main screen.  
directly.  
Scan to Email: Enters Scan to Email menu.(Page 7.1)  
Scan to PC:Enters Scan to PC menu.(Page 7.2)  
Scan to Server:Enters Scan to Server menu.(Page 7.2)  
Scan to USB: Enters Scan to USB menu.(Page 13.2)  
Machine Status: Shows the current status of the machine.  
Admin Setting: Allows an administrator to set up the machine.  
Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their  
status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.  
SmarThru Workflow: Enters the SmarThru Workflow menu.  
Usage Page Report:You can see the report on the amount of  
(Optional)  
printouts depending on the type.  
Machine Status: Enters Machine Status menu, which shows the  
current status of the machine.  
Job Status button  
When you press Job Status button, the screen shows the lists of  
currently running jobs, queued jobs and completed jobs.  
Admin Setting: Enters Admin Setting menu, which allows an  
administrator to set up the machine.  
Tray Management: Enters Tray Management menu, which  
shows the currently installed tray and their status. You can also  
change the paper settings for each tray.  
Usage Page Report:You can see the report on the amount of  
printouts depending on the type.  
Toner Info.: Shows amount of toner used.  
LCD Brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.  
: You can change the display language.  
: Guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the  
machine. Follow the instruction on the LCD. This icon appears only  
when you connect an USB memory module.  
Current Job tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending.  
Completed Job tab: Provides the list of completed jobs.  
Active Notice tab: Displays any error codes that have occurred.  
No.: Gives the order of jobs.  
Job Name: Shows job information like name and type.  
Status: Gives the current status of each job.  
Logout: Logs out from the currently logged in account.  
User: Provides user name, mainly computer name.  
1.6  
<Introduction>  
       
Job Type: Displays details of the active job, such as job type, recipient  
phone number and other information.  
Detail: Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the  
Status  
Description  
Green On  
The machine is on-line and can be used.  
Current Job Completed Job and Active Notice list.  
,
Delete: Removes the selected job from the list.  
Delete All: Removes all the jobs from the list.  
Close: Closes the job status window and switches to previous view.  
Blinking • When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine  
is receiving data from the computer.  
• When the backlight blinks rapidly, the machine  
is printing data.  
Power Saver button  
When the machine is not in use, save electricity with the provided power  
save mode. Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode.  
(Page 3.6)  
Red  
On  
• The imaging unit is out of lifespan. Remove  
the old imaging unit and install a new one.  
(Page 13.6)  
• A toner cartridge has reached its estimated  
If you press Power Saver button for more than two seconds, a window appears,  
requesting that you turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is turned off.  
This button can also be used to turn the button on.  
a
cartridge life . Remove the old toner cartridge  
and install a new one. (Page 13.4)  
• A paper jam has occurred. (Page 14.3)  
• The cover is opened. Close the cover.  
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in  
the tray.  
• The machine has stopped due to a major  
error. Check the display message.  
(Page 14.10)  
Status  
Description  
Off  
• The machine is not in the power save mode.  
• The machine is in the low power save mode.  
Blue  
On  
The machine is in the power save mode.  
Blink  
The machine is in the ready power save mode.  
• The waste toner container not installated in  
the machine, or full waste toner container.  
(Page 13.8)  
Interrupt button  
When you press Interrupt button, the machine goes into interrupt mode  
which means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job. When the urgent  
copy job completes, the previous printing job continues.  
Blinking • A minor error has occurred and the machine  
is waiting the error to be cleared. Check the  
display message. When the problem is  
cleared, the machine resumes.  
Status  
Description  
• Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.  
The estimated cartridge life of toner is close.  
You can temporarily improve print quality by  
redistributing the toner. (Page 13.4)  
Off  
The machine is not in interrupt printing mode.  
The machine is in interrupt printing mode.  
Blue  
On  
Note  
Interrupt mode is resumed at default value (Off) after the  
machine is shut down or reset.  
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life,  
which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to  
ISO/IEC 19798. (See General specifications.) The number of pages may be  
affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and media  
size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when “End of  
life, Replace with new [xxx] toner cartridge” appears and the printer stops  
printing.  
Understanding the Status LED  
When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's  
condition by the light color of it's action.  
Note  
Check the message on the display screen, and follow the  
instruction on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part.  
(Page 14.1) If the problem persists, call for service.  
Status  
Description  
• The machine is off-line.  
Off  
• The machine is in power save mode. When  
data is received, or any button is pressed, it  
switches to on-line automatically.  
1.7  
<
Introduction>  
             
Menu map  
Machine Status  
Admin Setting  
Tray Management  
Supplies Life tab  
Machine Info. tab  
General tab (Page 12.2)  
Setup tab (Page 12.5)  
Print/Report tab  
Tray  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the  
machine or use the machine's functions. These menus can be accessed  
by pressing Machine Setup, Job Status or touching menus on the  
display screen. Refer to the following diagram.  
MP Tray  
Tray2  
Tray3  
Usage Page Report  
Main screen  
Supplies Life  
Machine Info.  
The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel.  
Some menus are grayed out depending on your model.  
Copy  
Fax (Optional)  
Documents Box  
Machine Setup button  
Basic tab (Page 5.1)  
Original Size  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Duplex  
Basic tab (Page 6.2)  
Address Book  
Duplex  
Add  
When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel, the  
screen displays four menus. Machine Status shows the supplies life,  
billing, counters and reports. Admin Setting lets you set the advanced  
setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently. Tray Management  
shows the currently installed tray and their status. Usage Page Report  
can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper  
size and type.  
Delete  
Resolution  
Edit  
Output  
Advanced tab (Page 6.2)  
Original Size  
Delay Send  
Detail  
Original Type  
Color Mode  
Darkness  
Search  
Enter  
Priority Send  
Polling  
Mailbox  
System Box tab  
Detail  
Paper Supply  
Advanced tab (Page 5.1)  
ID Copy  
Image tab (Page 6.3)  
Original Type  
Darkness  
Enter  
N-Up  
Poster Copy  
Clone Copy  
Book Copy  
Booklet  
Job Status button  
Erase Background  
Color Mode  
This menu shows the job in process, in waiting, in completed and the  
notice message such as an error. (Page 1.6)  
Covers  
Transparencies  
WaterMark  
Overlay  
Current Job  
Completed Job  
Active Notice  
AutoCrop  
Multi-Bin  
Image tab  
(Page 5.2)  
Erase Edge  
Erase  
Detail  
Detail  
Close  
Detail  
Close  
Delete  
Delete All  
Close  
Background  
Margin Shift  
Scan Enhance  
Adjust  
Backside  
Image  
USB (Optional)  
Scan to Email  
Scan to Server  
Options tab(Page 7.2)  
USB Format  
USB Print  
Scan to USB  
Basic tab  
Advanced tab  
Image tab  
Output tab  
Standard  
WorkFlow  
Scan to PC  
Scan to USB  
Options tab(Page 7.2)  
Basic tab  
Favorite tab  
Advanced tab  
Image tab  
My Workform tab  
Public Workform tab  
Output tab  
1.8  
<
Introduction>  
           
OS  
Contents  
2Software overview  
Windows  
Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of  
your printer’s features.  
PostScript Printer driver: Use this driver to print  
documents with complex fonts and graphics in the PS  
language.  
Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image  
Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for scanning  
documents on your machine.  
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the  
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs  
during printing.  
This chapter gives you an overview of the software that comes with your  
machine. Further details how to use the software are explained in the  
Software section.  
This chapter includes:  
a
SmarThru Office : This is the accompanying Windows-  
Supplied software  
based software for your multi-functional machine.  
Scan Manager:This program allows you to scan a  
document on your machine and save it to a network-  
connected computer.  
Direct Printing Utility: This program allows you to print  
PDF files directly.  
SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP  
addresses. You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.  
Samsung Network PC Fax:You can send a fax from  
your computer without going to the machine.  
Samsung AnyWeb Print: This program helps you to  
screen-capture, preview, scrap and print the screen of  
Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you  
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer,  
you must install the printer and scanner software. If you are a Windows  
a Linux OS user, download the software from the Samsung website  
Note  
Machine software are occasionally updated for reasons like  
release of new operating system and etc. If needed, download the  
printer).  
use the ordinary program. Click Start  
>
All programs  
>
Samsung Priters Samsung AnyWeb Print  
>
>
Dowload the latest version. This tool is available only  
for Windows operating systems.  
Samsung Easy Color Manager: This program helps  
Samsung color laser machine users to adjust color as  
they like. Users can adjust the printout color as they see  
them on the monitor. The adjusted color can be stored  
on the printer driver and applied to printouts.  
(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/  
Linux  
Printer driver: Use this driver to run your machine from  
a Linux computer and print documents.  
SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.  
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the  
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs  
during printing.  
Macintosh  
Printer driver: Use this file to run your machine from a  
Macintosh computer and print documents.  
Scan driver: TWAIN driver is available for scanning  
documents on your machine.  
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the  
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs  
during printing.  
2.1  
<
Software overview>  
       
a. Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image  
editor and to send the image by email. You can also open another image  
editor program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru. For details, please  
refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program.  
System requirements  
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following  
requirements:  
Windows  
Printer driver features  
Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.  
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:  
• Paper source selection  
Requirement (recommended)  
Operating  
Free disk  
space  
system  
• Paper size, orientation and media type  
• Number of copies  
CPU  
RAM  
Pentium II 400 MHz  
(Pentium III 933 MHz) (128 MB)  
64 MB  
600 MB  
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following  
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer  
drivers:  
Windows 2000  
Windows XP  
Pentium III 933 MHz  
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
128 MB  
(256 MB)  
1.5 GB  
PCL 6  
Windows  
O
PostScript  
Macintosh  
O
Feature  
Windows  
Server 2003  
Pentium III 933 MHz  
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
128 MB  
(512 MB)  
1.25 GB to  
2 GB  
Windows  
O
Linux  
O
Print quality  
option  
Windows  
Server 2008  
Pentinum IV 1 GHz  
(Pentinum IV 2 GHz)  
512 MB  
(2048 MB)  
10 GB  
15 GB  
16 GB  
Poster  
printing  
O
O
X
X
X
Pentium IV 3 GHz  
512 MB  
(1024 MB)  
Windows Vista  
Windows 7  
Multiple  
O
O
O
Pentium IV 1 GHz 32- 1 GB (2  
bit or 64-bit processor  
or higher  
pages per  
sheet (N-up)  
(2, 4)  
GB)  
a
Fit to page  
printing  
O
O
O
O
• Supports DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB  
memory (to enable the Aero theme).  
• DVD-R/W Drive  
Scale printing  
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
Pentium IV 1 GHz  
512 MB  
10 GB  
Different  
source for  
first page  
Windows  
Server 2008 R2  
(x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) (2048 MB)  
processors (2 GHz or  
faster)  
Watermark  
Overlay  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
Note  
• Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for  
all Windows operating systems.  
b
Duplex  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
• Users who have an administrator right can install the  
software.  
Store Print  
Delay Print  
Spool Print  
Proof Print  
Stapler  
Windows Terminal Service is compatible with this machine.  
O
a. This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10.3.  
b. The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.  
2.2  
<Software overview>  
           
Macintosh  
Requirement (recommended)  
Free  
disk  
CPU  
RAM  
space  
• Intel Processor  
• Power PC G4/ G5  
• 128 MB for a  
Power PC  
1 GB  
based Mac  
(512 MB)  
• 512 MB for a  
Intel-based  
Mac (1 GB)  
Mac OS X 10.4  
or lower  
• Intel Processor  
Mac OS X 10.5 • 867 MHz or faster  
512 MB (1 GB)  
1 GB  
1 GB  
Power PC G4/ G5  
Mac OS X 10.6 • Intel Processor  
1 GB (2 GB  
Linux  
Item  
Requirement (recommended)  
Operating system  
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)  
Fedora Core 2~9 (32/64bit)  
SuSE Linux 9.1 (32bit)  
SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3,  
11.0, 11.1 (32/64bit)  
Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)  
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/  
64bit)  
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/  
64bit)  
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/  
64bit)  
Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64bit)  
CPU  
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (IntelCore2)  
512 MB (1024 MB)  
RAM  
free HDD space  
1 GB (2 GB)  
Note  
• It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for  
working with large scanned images.  
• The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at  
maximum.  
2.3  
<Software overview>  
   
A horizontal plane must be within 5 mm (0.02 inches) both from front  
to rear and from right to left.  
3Getting Started  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the  
machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Caution  
• When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it up side  
down, or the inside of the machine may be contaminated by  
toner, which can cause damage to the printer or bad printing  
quality.  
Setting up the hardware  
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained  
in Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and  
complete following steps.  
• If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a  
long time, turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the  
ready mode. Then close the scan lid and turn the power off.  
And open the scan lid and lock the scanner lock.  
1
Select a stable location.  
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation.  
Allow extra space to open covers and trays. Under the altitude  
1,000 m (3,281 ft) is effective for printing. See the general settings  
for Altitude Adjustment in page 3.5.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.  
Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.  
Install both the toner cartridges and imaging units.  
Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.  
Turn the machine on.  
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or  
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to  
the edge of your desk or table.  
Note  
This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.  
3.1  
<Getting Started>  
     
Setting a Color Standard  
Setting up the network  
When you first turn the machine’s power on, a pop up asking you to set  
the color standard will appear. This is to improve the printouts’ color  
quality. Follow below steps to set the color standard.  
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your  
network printer. You can set up the basic network settings with the  
machine's touch screen.  
1
2
Turn the machine’s power on.  
Note  
If you want to use the USB cable, connect the cable between a  
computer and you machine. Refer to the software installation in  
Software section.  
A pop up message appears asking you to start the setting a color  
standard.  
Press Start to start setting a color standard.  
Or press Cancel to do it later.  
Supported operating systems  
Note  
The following table shows the network environments supported by the  
machine:  
• If a message asking you to select a country appears, select a  
country first, then the setting a color standard message will  
appear.  
Item  
Requirements  
• If you press Cancel, this message will appear again the next  
time you turn the machine’s power on.  
Network interface 10/100/1000 Base-TX  
• The machine should be in a ready mode to set the color  
standard. If the machine is in use, a pop up informing you a job is  
in a pending state will appear. Press Retry to retry or press  
Cancel to try it later.  
Network  
operating system  
• Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/2008 R2  
• Various Linux OS  
• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6  
Network  
protocols  
• TCP/IP on windows  
• DHCP  
• BOOTP  
3
After a moment a message asking you to print a pattern paper will  
appear.  
Press Print. Pattern printing will start.  
Note  
Note  
There should be a white paper in the tray to print a pattern paper.  
If you want to set up DHCP network protocol, go to http://  
Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating  
system and install the program. This program will allow you to set  
network parameters automatically. Follow the instructions in the  
installation window. This program does not support Linux.  
4
5
When pattern paper is printed out, place the pattern paper on the  
scanner glass and press Scan.  
Make sure to align the arrow on the pattern paper with the arrow on  
the coner of the scanner glass.  
When setting a color standard completed message appears, press  
Close.  
Configuring network protocol via the machine  
You can setup TCP/IP Network parameters please follow the steps listed  
below.  
Note  
You can also use Setting Color Standard menu to set the color  
standard anytime you want.  
1
Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45  
Ethernet cable.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
2
3
4
5
Make sure you turned on the machine.  
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
Press Admin Setting > Setup > Color > Auto Color Tone  
Adjustment > Setting Color Standard( You can only select  
this option if Auto Color Tone Adjustment is set to On).  
When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the  
password input area, then the question marks appears. Use the  
number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Once  
the password is entered, press OK. (Factory setting:1111)  
6
7
Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.  
Select TCP/IP Protocol.  
3.2  
<Getting Started>  
             
8
9
Press IP Setting.  
Installing the software  
Select Static and then enter IP Address, Subnet Mask and  
Gateway address fields. Touch the input area then, enter addresses  
by number keypad on the control panel.  
You have to install the machine software for printing and scanning. The  
software includes drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.  
Note  
• The following procedure is for when the machine is being used  
as a network machine. If you want to connect a machine with  
a USB cable, refer to Software section .  
• The following procedure is based on the Windows XP  
operating system. The procedure and popup window which  
appears during the installation may differ depending on the  
operating system, the printer feature, or the interface in use.  
(See Software section.)  
1
Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed.  
(Page 3.2) All applications should be closed on your computer  
before beginning installation.  
Note  
Contact the network administrator, if you are not sure how to  
configure.  
2
3
Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window  
10 Press OK.  
appears. Click Next.  
Note  
• If the installation window does not appear, click Start > Run. Type  
X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your  
drive and click OK.  
You can also set up the network settings through the network  
administration programs.  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: Web-based printer  
management solution for network administrators. SyncThru™  
Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of  
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and  
troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate  
internet access. Download this program from http://  
• If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server  
R2, click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Run.  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents  
your drive and click OK.  
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and  
Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run  
program field, and click Continue in the User Account Control  
windows.  
SyncThru™ Web Service: Web server embedded on your  
network print server, which allows you to:  
4
Click Next.  
- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine  
to connect to various network environments.  
- Customize email settings and set up address book for  
scanning to email.  
- Customize server settings and set up address book for  
scanning to the FTP or SMB servers.  
- Customize printer, copy, and fax settings.  
SetIP: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface  
and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP  
protocol. You can only use IPv4 setting for Set IP. See  
• Select a language from the drop-down list, if necessary.  
3.3  
<Getting Started>  
   
5
Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click  
Next.  
7
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to  
print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung  
printers in order to receive information from Samsung. If you so  
desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.  
Note  
• If your printer does not work properly after the installation, try  
to reinstall the printer driver. See Software section.  
• During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer  
detects the location information for your operating system and  
sets the default paper size for your machine. If you use a  
different Windows location, you must change the paper size to  
match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to  
change the paper size after installation is complete.  
Using the SetIP program  
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which  
is the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface.  
Especially, it is for the network administrator to set several network IPs at  
the same time. The following procedure is based on windows XP.  
6
The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the  
printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.  
Note  
You can only use SetIP program when your machine is  
connected to a network.  
You can only use IPv4 setting for Set IP.  
developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, select  
the program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer  
operating system, and install the program. This program will  
allow you to fix the network parameter automatically. Follow  
the instruction in the installation window. This Bonjour  
program does not support Linux  
• If you click the Advanced button, you can search a printer with the  
SNMP Community Name. Default name is ‘public’.  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the  
list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the network.  
To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP  
address for the printer.  
Installing the program  
1
Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine. When the  
driver CD runs automatically, close the window.  
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a  
2
Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your  
CD-ROM drive.)  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared  
Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a  
shared printer by clicking the Browse button.  
3
4
5
6
Double click Application > SetIP.  
Double click Setup.exe to install this program.  
Select the language.  
Note  
• If you are not sure of IP address, contact your network  
administrator or print network information. (See  
Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.  
Starting the program  
• If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off  
the firewall and click Update.  
7
From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Samsung  
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.  
3.4  
<Getting Started>  
 
8
9
Select the name of your printer and click  
.
6
Select appropriate option, and then click OK.  
Note  
Note  
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator.  
If you cannot find your printer name, click  
list.  
to refresh the  
Click Settings > Machine Settings > System > Setup >  
Altitude Adj.  
Enter the network interface's MAC address, IP address, subnet  
mask, default gateway, and then click Apply.  
Machine's basic settings  
Note  
If you do not know the network interface's MAC address,  
print the machine's network information report. (See  
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default  
settings. Check the next explanation if you would like to set or change  
values.  
10 Click OK to confirm the settings.  
Setting the authentication password  
11 Click Exit to close the SetIP program.  
To set your machine up or change the settings, you have to login. To  
change password, follow the next steps.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Altitude adjustment  
Press Admin Setting.  
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined  
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information  
will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best  
quality of print.  
When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the  
password input area, then the question marks appears, use the  
number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Then,  
press OK. (Factory setting:1111)  
4
5
6
Press the Setup tab > Security  
Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the  
machine.  
Press Change Admin. Password  
.
Value  
Enter old and new password, and then confirm the new password.  
High 3  
High 2  
High 1  
Normal  
0
7
Press OK.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
Setting the date and time  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
When you set the time and date, they are used in Delay fax and Delay  
Print, also they are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct,  
you need to change it for correct time being.  
4
5
Press the General tab.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Altitude Adjustment.  
Press Admin Setting.  
3.5  
<Getting Started>  
                 
3
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
Using power saving feature  
The machine provides power saving features.  
4
5
Press the General tab > Date & Time > Date&Time.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Select date and time using left/right arrows. Or touch the insert area  
and use the numeric keypad on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
6
Press OK.  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
Note  
4
5
6
Press the General tab.  
To change the format of date and time, press Date Format and  
Time Format.  
Press down arrow to switch the screen, press Power Saver.  
Select appropriate option and time.  
Changing the display language  
To change the language that appears on the display, refer to the following  
steps.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
4
5
6
7
Press the General tab.  
Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language.  
Select the desired language.  
Low Power Save: Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under  
100 °C, and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan  
for the fuser unit.  
Press OK.  
Power Save: Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after  
certain time.  
Setting job timeout  
Auto Wake: The machine automatically wakes up from the power  
save mode on the time you have set.  
When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the  
current location. You can set the amount of time the machine will wait.  
7
Press OK.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Setting the default tray and paper  
Press Admin Setting.  
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing  
job. (Page 12.2)  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press the General tab.  
Press Timers.  
Press Admin Setting.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
Select System Timeout.  
Select On.  
4
5
Press the General tab.  
Select a duration using left/right arrows.  
Press OK.  
Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray  
Management.  
6
7
Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.  
Press OK.  
3.6  
<Getting Started>  
                   
6
7
8
Click PCL.  
Note  
If the optional tray is not installed, the tray options on the screen  
is grayed out.  
Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list.  
Click Apply.  
Note  
Changing the default settings  
Following information shows the proper font list for  
corresponding languages.  
You can set the default values for copy, fax, email, scan and paper all at  
once.  
• Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic  
• Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)  
• Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
• Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,  
Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
• OCR : OCR-A, OCR-B  
4
5
Press the General tab > Default Settings > Default Option.  
Press the function you want to change, and change its settings.  
Understanding the keyboard  
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, or special symbols using  
the keyboard on the touch screen. This keyboard is specially arranged  
like a normal keyboard for better usability for the user.  
Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the  
keyboard pops up on the screen. The keyboard below is the default  
showing the lowercase letters.  
For example, if you want to change the default setting of the  
brightness & darkness for a copy job, press Copy > Darkness and  
adjust the brightness & darkness.  
6
Press OK.  
: Moves the cursor between characters in the input area.  
Changing the font setting  
1
Backspace: Deletes the character on the left side of the cursor.  
Delete: Deletes the character on the right side of the cursor.  
Clear: Deletes all characters in the input area.  
Your machine has preset the font for your region or country.  
2
3
4
5
6
If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition such as  
the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows:  
1
Ensure that you have installed the printer driver from the provided  
software CD.  
Input area: Enters letters within this line.  
Shift: Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys or  
vice versa.  
2
Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or  
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the  
status bar in Mac OS X.  
Symbols: Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the  
symbol keyboard.  
7
3
Click Printer Setting.  
Space: Enters a blank between characters.  
OK: Saves and closes input result.  
8
9
If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru™ Web  
Service screen appears automatically.  
Cancel: Cancels and closes input result.  
10  
4
5
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See  
Click Settings > Machine Settings > Printer.  
3.7  
<Getting Started>  
           
2
Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with  
the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.  
4Loading originals and print  
media  
This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into  
your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Loading originals  
You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying,  
scanning, and sending a fax.  
3
Close the scanner lid.  
Note  
• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy  
quality and toner consumption.  
On the scanner glass  
Make sure that no originals are in the DADF. If an original is detected in  
the DADF, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner  
glass. To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled  
images, use the scanner glass.  
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the  
printout. Always keep it clean. (Page 13.2)  
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the  
scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then  
close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,  
start copying with the lid open.  
1
Lift and open the scanner lid.  
In the DADF  
2
Using the DADF, you can load up to 100 sheets of 75 g/m (20 lb bond)  
paper for one job.  
When you use the DADF:  
• Do not load paper smaller than 69(W) x 145(L) mm (2.7 x 5.7 inches)  
or larger than 216(W) x 356(L) mm (8.5 x 14 inches).  
• Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:  
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
- coated paper  
- onion skin or thin paper  
- wrinkled or creased paper  
- curled or rolled paper  
- torn paper  
• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.  
• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely  
dry before loading.  
• Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.  
• Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents  
having other unusual characteristics.  
4.1  
<
Loading originals and print media>  
                 
To load an original into the DADF:  
Selecting print media  
1
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  
loading originals.  
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,  
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the  
guidelines for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the  
guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:  
• Poor print quality  
• Increased paper jams  
• Premature wear on the machine.  
2
Load the originals face up into the DADF. Make sure that the bottom  
of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the  
document input tray.  
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are  
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output  
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:  
• The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are  
described later in this section.  
• Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate  
for your project.  
• Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce  
sharper, more vibrant images.  
• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how  
crisp the printing looks on the paper.  
Note  
• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section  
and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result  
of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity  
levels, or other variables over which Samsung has no control.  
• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it  
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.  
3
Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.  
Caution  
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may  
cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered  
by Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.  
Caution  
Dust on the DADF glass may cause black streaks on the  
printout. Always keep it clean.  
4.2  
<
Loading originals and print media>  
   
Specification on print media  
a
Type  
Size  
Dimensions  
Weight  
Capacity  
2
• 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond) • 500 sheets of 80 g/m  
for the tray1.  
• 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond)  
for the multi-purpose tray  
• 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond)  
for the high capacity feeder  
Plain paper  
Letter  
Legal  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)  
210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)  
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)  
182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)  
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)  
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)  
148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)  
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)  
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)  
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)  
98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)  
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)  
162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)  
114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
2
[20 lb(75 g/m ) bond 520  
sheets] paper in the tray1  
2
US Folio  
A4  
• 100 sheets of 80 g/m (20 lb  
bond) in the multi-purpose  
tray  
Oficio  
JIS B5  
ISO B5  
Executive  
A5  
2
• 1,950 sheets of 80 g/m  
[20 lb(75 g/m ) bond 2,100  
sheets] in the high capacity  
2
b
feeder  
Statement  
A6  
• 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)  
paper in the tray1  
• 10 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)  
in the multi-purpose tray  
Envelope  
Envelope Monarch  
Envelope No. 10  
Envelope No. 9  
Envelope DL  
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)  
Envelope C5  
Envelope C6  
• 100 sheets of 80 g/m2  
(20 lb) paper in the tray1  
Transparency  
Labels  
Letter, A4, Oficio  
138 to 146 g/m2 (36 to 39 lb  
bond)  
• 20 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)  
in the multi-purpose tray  
• 100 sheets of 80 g/m2  
(20 lb) paper in the tray1  
• 35 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)  
in the multi-purpose tray  
• 100 sheets of paper in the  
tray1  
Letter, Legal, US Folio,  
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Executive, A5, Statement  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb  
bond)  
• 120 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb  
bond) for the tray1  
• 120 to 220 g/m2 (24 to 58 lb  
c
Card stock  
Letter, Legal, US Folio,  
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Executive, A5, Statement,  
Post Card 4x6  
• 10 sheets of paper in the  
bond) for the multi-purpose tray multi-purpose tray  
• 90 to 120 g/m2 (24 to 32 lb  
bond) for the tray1  
• 250 sheets of paper in the  
Thick paper  
Letter, Legal, US Folio,  
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Executive, A5, Statement,  
Post Card 4x6  
tray1  
• 90 to 120 g/m2 (24 to 32 lb  
bond) for the multi-purpose tray multi-purpose tray  
• 50 sheets of paper in the  
• 90~105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb bond) • 1250 sheets of paper in the  
b
for high capacity feeder  
high capacity feeder  
Minimum size (custom)  
Maximum size (custom)  
98 x 148 mm (3.86 x 5.83 inches)  
216 x 1200 mm (8.5 x 47.24 inches)  
60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb bond)  
a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.  
b. High capacity feeder does not support A6.  
c. We recommend using Card stock that is less than 0.23mm thick.  
4.3  
<Loading originals and print media>  
   
Guidelines for special print media  
Media sizes supported in each mode  
Media type  
Guidelines  
Size  
Source  
Envelopes  
• Successful printing on envelopes depends upon  
the quality of the envelopes. When selecting  
envelopes, consider the following factors:  
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper  
should not exceed 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond) or  
jamming may occur.  
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes  
should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and  
should not contain air.  
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled,  
nicked, or otherwise damaged.  
- Temperature: You should use envelopes that  
are compatible with the heat and pressure of  
the machine during operation.  
Copy mode  
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, • Tray 1  
Oficio, Executive, ISO  
B5, A5  
• Optional tray  
Multi-purpose tray  
• High capacity feeder  
Single side  
printing  
All sizes supported by • Tray 1  
the machine  
• Optional tray  
• Multi-purpose tray  
• High capacity feeder  
a
Duplex printing  
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, • Tray 1  
Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5,  
Executive, A5,  
Statement  
• Optional tray  
• Multi-purpose tray  
• High capacity feeder  
• Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp  
and well creased folds.  
b
Fax mode  
Letter, A4, Legal  
• Ttray 1  
• Do not use stamped envelopes.  
• Optional tray  
• High capacity feeder  
• Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps,  
windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or  
other synthetic materials.  
a. 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb bond) only  
b. Only the optional fax kit is installed.  
• Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
• Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope  
extends all the way to the corner of the  
envelope.  
Guidelines for selecting and storing print media  
When selecting or loading paper, envelopes, or other print materials,  
keep these guidelines in mind:  
• Always use print media that conform with the specifications listed on  
page 4.3.  
• Attempting to print on damp, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper can cause  
paper jams and poor print quality.  
Acceptable  
• For the best print quality, use only high quality copier grade paper  
specifically recommended for use in laser printers.  
• Avoid using the following media types:  
- Paper with embossed lettering, perforations, or a texture that is too  
smooth or too rough  
Unacceptable  
• Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with  
more than one flap that folds over to seal must  
use adhesives compatible with the printer’s  
fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your  
machine’s specification to view the fusing  
temperature, see page 17.1. The extra flaps and  
strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams,  
and may even damage the fuser.  
- Erasable bond paper  
- Multi-paged paper  
- Synthetic paper and thermally reactive paper  
- Carbonless paper and Tracing paper.  
Use of these types of paper could result in paper jams, chemical  
smells, and damage to your machine.  
• Store print media in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it.  
Place cartons on pallets or shelves, not on the floor. Do not place  
heavy objects on top of the paper, whether it is packaged or  
unpackaged. Keep it away from moisture or other conditions that can  
cause it to wrinkle or curl.  
• For the best print quality, position margins no  
closer than 15 mm from the edges of the  
envelope.  
• Avoid printing over the area where the  
envelope’s seams meet.  
• Store unused print media at temperatures between 15 °C and 30 °C.  
The relative humidity should be between 10% and 70%.  
• Store unused print media in a moisture-proof wrap, such as a plastic  
container or bag, to prevent dust and moisture from contaminating  
your paper.  
• Load special media types one sheet at a time through the multi-  
purpose tray to avoid paper jams.  
To prevent print media, such as transparencies and label sheets, from  
sticking together, remove them as they print out.  
4.4  
<Loading originals and print media>  
       
Media type  
Guidelines  
Media type  
Labels  
Guidelines  
Transparencies • To avoid damaging the machine, use only  
transparencies designed for use in laser printers.  
• Transparencies used in the printer must be able  
to withstand the machine’s fusing temperature.  
Check your machine’s specification to view the  
fusing temperature, see page 17.1.  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels  
designed for use in laser printers.  
• When selecting labels, consider the following  
factors:  
- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be  
stable at your machine’s fusing temperature.  
Check your machine’s specification to view the  
• Place them on a flat surface after removing them  
from the machine.  
fusing temperature, see page 17.1  
.
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no  
exposed backing between them. Labels can  
peel off sheets that have spaces between the  
labels, causing serious jams.  
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with  
no more than 13 mm ( 5 inches) of curl in any  
direction.  
• Do not leave them in the paper tray for long  
periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate  
on them, resulting in spotty printing.  
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints,  
handle them carefully.  
To avoid fading, do not expose printed  
transparencies to prolonged sunlight.  
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles,  
bubbles, or other indications of separation.  
• Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive  
material between labels. Exposed areas can  
cause labels to peel off during printing, which  
can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can  
also cause damage to machine components.  
• Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine  
more than once. The adhesive backing is  
designed for only a single pass through the  
machine.  
• Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled,  
curled, or have any torn edges.  
• When you use the color printed transparency on  
a beam projector, due to toner’s characteristics,  
it won’t be reflected in colors.  
Caution  
• Recommended media: Transparency for  
a Color Laser Printers produced by HP,  
Xerox and 3M.  
• It is not recommended to use  
paperbacked transparencies such as  
Xerox 3R91334, which can cause a jam  
or be scratched.  
• Do not use labels that are separating from the  
backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or  
otherwise damaged.  
Card stock or  
custom-sized  
materials  
Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm (3.86  
inches) wide or 148 mm (5.83 inches) long.  
• In the software application, set margins at least  
6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of  
the material.  
Preprinted  
paper  
• Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant  
ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release  
hazardous emissions when subjected to the  
printer’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second.  
Check your machine’s specification to view the  
fusing temperature, see page 17.1.  
• Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and  
should not adversely affect printer rollers.  
• Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a  
moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes  
during storage.  
• Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms  
and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is  
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come  
off preprinted paper, reducing print quality.  
Note  
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause  
problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by  
Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.  
4.5  
<Loading originals and print media>  
2
After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width  
guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly  
touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to  
the edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.  
Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray  
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to  
adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.  
1
paper length guide  
paper width guide  
1
2
2
Note  
If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder, refer to  
Quick Install Sheet to adjust paper size.  
Note  
1
Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is  
preset to Letter or A4 size depending on the country. To load  
another size, hold the lever and move the length guide to the  
corresponding position.  
• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the  
materials to warp.  
• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper  
jams.  
4.6  
<Loading originals and print media>  
 
Preprinted paper  
Envelope  
Punched paper  
Label  
Transparency  
Loading paper  
Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional  
high capacity feeder  
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the  
tray 1. The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 520 sheets of 80 g/m (20 lb  
2
bond) plain paper.  
Card stock  
Letterhead paper  
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray  
to load an additional 520 sheets of paper. (Page 15.1)  
1
To load paper, pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the  
side you want to print facing up.  
2
After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width  
guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly  
touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to  
the edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.  
Note  
• When using a transparency, avoid using transparency without  
stripe band or with stripe band on the longer side of the paper.  
It might cause a paper feeding jam.  
• Place the side to be printed facing up.  
Note  
• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials  
to warp.  
• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper jams.  
4.7  
<Loading originals and print media>  
         
3
After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray. See  
page 4.9 for copying and faxing or Software section for PC-  
printing.  
3
Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down.  
Note  
If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a  
time in the multi-purpose tray.  
In the multi-purpose tray  
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,  
such as transparencies, postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful  
for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper.  
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray  
• Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.  
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in  
the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print media.  
Note  
• Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into  
the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.  
• When using a transparency, avoid using transparency without  
stripe band or with stripe band on the longer side of the paper.  
It might cause a paper feeding jam.  
• Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and  
print quality problems. (Page 4.2)  
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading  
them into the multi-purpose tray.  
To load paper in the multi-purpose tray:  
1
Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose tray  
extension, as shown.  
• Place the side to be printed facing down.  
Preprinted paper  
Envelope  
Punched paper  
Label  
Transparency  
Card stock  
Letterhead paper  
Banner paper  
2
If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to  
separate the pages before loading.  
Make sure you load one sheet at a time,  
and hold the paper with two hands for  
the paper not to fall since the paper  
length is longer than the multi-tray  
length.  
For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the  
print side. Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems.  
4.8  
<Loading originals and print media>  
     
4
Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them  
to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be  
bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.  
Setting the paper size and type  
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and  
type. These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes.  
For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in the  
application program you use on your PC. (See Software section.)  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
4
5
Press the General tab.  
Press the down arrow to switch the screen, press Tray  
Management.  
6
7
Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.  
5
6
After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multi-  
purpose tray. See page 4.9 for copying and faxing or the Software  
section for PC-printing.  
Press OK.  
Note  
If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper, select  
Custom in the Paper tab in the printer propeties. See Software  
Note  
The settings made from the printer driver override the  
settings on the control panel.  
section  
.
After printing, fold the multi-purpose tray extension and close the  
multi-purpose tray.  
4.9  
<Loading originals and print media>  
   
Note  
When Auto mode is used, there maybe some orginals for which  
the mode is not correctly switched between in color and black/  
white. In this case, select Color or B/W manually as  
appropriate to the original.  
5Copying  
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy  
machine.  
Light, Dark: Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is  
easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark  
images. (Page 5.5)  
This chapter includes:  
Paper Supply: Selects the paper supply tray.  
Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the  
document box for later use.  
Note  
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the  
Document Box chapter. (Page 10.1.)  
Understanding the Copy screen  
When you press Copy on the Main screen, the Ready To Copy screen  
appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options. All the  
options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections  
easily.  
Advanced tab  
If the screen displays an other menu, press (  
screen.  
) to go to the Main  
Basic tab  
Job Build: Allows you to copy several pages or different types of  
originals into a single copy. (Page 5.5.).  
ID Copy: Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This  
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a  
business card. (Page 5.6)  
N-Up: Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of  
paper. (Page 5.6)  
Original Size: Selects the size of the originals. (Page 5.3)  
Poster Copy: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages.  
Reduce/Enlarge: Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.  
(Page 5.7)  
(Page 5.3)  
Clone Copy: Prints multiple image copies from the original  
Duplex: Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the  
document on a single page. (Page 5.8)  
paper. (Page 5.3)  
Book Copy: Allows you to copy an entire book. (Page 5.8)  
Output: Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options. If you  
install the optional stacker & stapler, then the staple related option  
appears. (Page 5.4)  
Booklet: Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided  
or 2-sided originals. (Page 5.8)  
Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Magazine: Improves the copy quality by  
selecting the document type for the current copy job. (Page 5.5)  
Covers: Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock  
taken from a different tray. (Page 5.9)  
Color, B/W, Auto: You can switch this mode among color, black/  
white and automatic mode. Select whether the user print copies in  
mono or color. If you select the Auto mode, the machine detects  
the original document and decide the output is colored or not. In  
this case, the copying speed will be reduced.  
Transparencies: Adds a blank or printed divider between  
transparencies within a set. (Page 5.9)  
WaterMark: Prints an image with the added watermark. (Page 5.9)  
Overlay: Prints an image with the image previously stored in your  
machine. (Page 5.9)  
5.1  
<
Copying>  
           
Auto Crop: Prints only the image of an original after cropping the  
blank parts like the margin. (Page 5.9)  
Copying originals  
Multi-Bin: Allows you to select the output mode. (Page 5.10)  
This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.  
1
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Image tab  
Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document face down.  
Erase Edge: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and  
fold creases along any of the four documents edges. (Page 5.10)  
Erase Background: Prints an image with no background.  
(Page 5.11)  
Margin Shift: Creates a binding edge for the document.  
(Page 5.11)  
Scan Enhance: Use this feature for the better quality of copy-  
output. (Page 5.11)  
3
Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size, Reduce/  
Adjust Backside Image: Allows you to copy and image and  
Enlarge, Duplex and more. (Page 5.3, Page 5.3)  
remove the back-side image shown through. (Page 5.11)  
4
Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen.  
5
6
Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
5.2  
<Copying>  
       
Note  
Reducing or enlarging copies  
To cancel the current copy job, press Stop on the control panel.  
Or you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status  
on the control panel. Select the job you want to cancel and  
press Delete.  
Press the Basic tab > Reduce/Enlarge, then use left/right arrows to  
reduce or enlarge an image on the paper.  
Press more to see the values.  
Changing the settings for each copy  
On the Basic tab of the Copy screen, you can select copy features  
before starting to copy.  
Note  
The Basic tab setting is only for each copy. That means that the  
setting does not apply to the next copy job. After finishing the  
current copy job, the machine automatically restores the default  
settings after certain time. Or the machine resume to default  
setting when you press the Clear All button on the control panel  
or when you press other menu such as fax or else except the  
Job Status screen.  
Original(100%): Prints texts or images the same size as originals.  
Auto Fit: Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the  
output paper.  
The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting.  
(Page 12.2)  
• Other preset values: Allows you to easily select commonly used  
values.  
Changing the size of originals  
Note  
Press the Basic tab > Original Size, then use left/right arrows to set the  
original size.  
The Custom option is different depending on where the  
originals is placed. In the DADF, 25~200% adjustment is  
possible. And in the scanner glass, 25~400% adjustment is  
possible.  
Press more to see the detail values.  
Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)  
Press the Basic tab > Duplex, then use left/right arrows to select Duplex  
value.  
Note  
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both  
sides of original, the message Another Page? appears after  
the first page copied. At this time, load the original’s the other  
side facing down and press Yes, then the machine starts  
scanning the second page of your original.  
Custom: Selects the scanning area of the original. Press the  
cardinal point arrows to set the size.  
Press more to see the detail values.  
1 -> 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints on one side  
of the paper, this function produces exactly the same print out from  
originals.  
Auto (DADF only): Automatically detects the size of originals, but  
this option supports only when originals are Legal, Letter, or A5  
sized. If the originals is mixed-sized, then the machine detects the  
largest original size and select the largest-sized paper in the tray.  
Mixed Size (Letter & Legal) (DADF only): Allows for the use of  
both of Letter and Legal sized papers together, and the machine  
uses the proper-sized paper from several trays. For example, if the  
originals are total 3 pages, 1st page is the letter-sized paper, 2nd  
page is the legal-sized paper, and 3rd page is the letter-sized  
paper, then the machine prints the output first letter, legal, and  
letter in order from several trays.  
1 -> 2 Sided: Scans one side of originals and prints them on both  
sides of the paper.  
• Other preset values: Allows user to easily select commonly used  
values.  
5.3  
<
Copying>  
                 
1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans one side of the originals and  
prints on both sides of the paper, but the information on the back  
side of the print out is rotated 180°.  
Reverse 2 -> 2 Sided: Scans the both sides of originals and prints  
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print  
out order of the originals. The machine prints the back sides of  
originals first, which means the front sides of originals is printed on  
the back side of a paper.  
2 -> 1 Sided: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of  
one on a separate sheet.  
Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)  
Press the Basic tab > Output, then use left/right arrows to select Collated or  
Stapled. This feature is supported only when the original is on the DADF.  
2 -> 2 Sided: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both  
sides of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print  
out from the originals.  
Note  
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both  
sides of original, the message Another Page? appears after the  
first page copied. At this time, load the original’s the other side  
facing down and press Yes, then the machine starts scanning  
the second page of your original.  
Press more to see the values.  
2 -> 1 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans both sides of the original and  
prints each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the  
back side of the printout is rotated 180 degree.  
Collated: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.  
Uncollated: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.  
Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided: Scans originals and prints them on both  
sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of  
the originals. The machine prints the second original first, which  
means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a  
paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every  
even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side  
of a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be  
printed on the back side of a paper.  
Staple, Portrait: Adds a single staple to all of your portrait-  
oriented output.  
Staple, Landscape: Adds a single staple to all of your landscape-  
oriented output.  
Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Sided2: Scans originals and prints  
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print  
out order of the originals. The machine prints the second original  
first, which means the firstly input original is printed on the back  
side of a paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers,  
every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front  
side of a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be  
printed on the back side of a paper. The information on the back  
side of the print out is rotated 180 degree.  
Note  
The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker &  
stapler. (Page 15.1)  
5.4  
<
Copying>  
   
Note  
Selecting the type of originals  
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the  
segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the  
unexpected users.  
Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type.  
1
2
3
4
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.  
Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.  
Press On to enable job build function.  
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.  
Photo: Use when originals are photographs.  
Magazine: Use when originals are magazines.  
Color Mode  
Select the color mode you want to use.  
Color: Copys the originals in color.  
B/W: Copys the originals in black and white.  
- Off: Disables Job Build feature.  
Auto: The machine automatically senses the color of the originals  
and copys in color or b/w according to the originals.  
- On: Enables Job Build feature.  
- Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is  
paused with this screen. is displayed Then the user can select to  
keep copying or stop.  
Changing the darkness  
- Print: Prints the sample page(s) of a segment to confirm the  
contents.  
This defines the degree of darkness. Use left/right arrows to change the  
level of light/dark in the printouts.  
- Delete: Deletes a segment.  
- Delete All: Deletes all segments.  
- Print All: Prints all segments.  
- Add Segment: Adds a new segment.  
- Cancel: Removes all segments in the list, and cancels the job.  
Using special copy features  
5
6
Press Add Segment.  
On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen, you can  
select specific copy features.  
Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document face down.  
7
8
Press Start on the control panel.  
Merging multiple jobs as a single copy  
Then the machine starts scanning.  
This feature allows you to merge multiple copy jobs into a single copy. For  
example, if you need to use the DADF and the scanner glass for a copy  
job, you can use this feature. In the picture below, each number means  
each segment order.  
Repeat step 5 to step 7.  
Note  
As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains, you  
can add segments without any restriction.  
Segment 1 from the DADF.  
Segment 2 from the  
scanner glass.  
9
After adding segments, press Print All.  
Segment 3 from the DADF.  
Segment 4 from the  
scanner glass.  
Segment 5 from the DADF.  
5.5  
<Copying>  
             
ID card copying  
Copying ID with the manual ID copy option  
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper  
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the  
original. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a  
business card.  
If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper, or adjust the copying  
position of the page, follow the next steps.  
Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people's driver's license  
cards (100mm X 80mm) in one page.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter password and press OK.  
3
4
5
6
Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup > Mamual ID Copy Setup.  
Press the number from the template list table.  
Press Edit Template.  
Note  
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this  
feature.  
Selec the appropriate option values and press OK.  
Template Name: Enter the template name.  
1
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass  
where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.  
Scan Position: Select the position for scanning. You should select  
the largest scanning position out of the originals.  
LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-000mm, RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-110mm/Y-  
090mm  
2
3
4
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy.  
Press Start on the control panel.  
Then the machine starts scanning the front side.  
5
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where  
arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.  
Number of Images: Select how many images are on a page.  
(select number 4.)  
Image Position: Select the position of a page which images are  
on. If you choose to copy four images, you have to select four  
positions here.  
6
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
First Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,  
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-100mm  
Note  
If this option is grayed out, select the Duplex option to 1 -> 1  
Sided.  
Second Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-020mm,  
RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-100mm  
Third Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,  
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-230mm  
5.6  
<Copying>  
     
Forth Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,  
BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-230mm  
Poster copying  
Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed  
pages together to make one poster-sized document. This copy feature is  
available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Each  
portion is scanned and printed on by one in the following order.  
7
Press OK, the template you have saved will be shown in the  
template list table.  
8
9
Press  
and select Copy.  
Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy > Mamual ID Copy Setup.  
1
2
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
10 Press the template you have saved from the template list.  
Note  
11 Press the Start button on the control panel. now follow the  
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use  
this feature.  
instruction on display to finish the ID copy for four images.  
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
3
4
Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)  
Press the Advanced tab > Poster Copy.  
The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4  
pages onto one sheet of paper.  
Note  
If this option is grayed out, select following options in the  
Basic tab to activate it;  
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided  
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)  
- Paper Supply to Tray.  
5
Press On to activate this feature.  
2-up copying  
4-up copying  
6
7
Press OK.  
1
2
3
4
5
Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. (Page 4.1)  
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
Press the Advanced tab > N-Up.  
Select Off, 2Up, or 4Up.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Note  
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned  
and printed one by one in the following order:  
Off: Copies an original onto one sheet of paper.  
2Up: Copies two separate originals onto one page.  
4Up: Copies four separate originals onto one page.  
6
Press Start on the control panel.  
Note  
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for  
the N-Up feature.  
5.7  
<Copying>  
       
Note  
Clone copying  
To remove shadows of a book edge, press the Image tab >  
Erase Edge > Book Center and Edge Erase.  
The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The  
number of images is automatically determined by the original image and  
the paper size.  
4
Select the binding option.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Left Page: Prints left page of the book.  
Right Page: Prints right page of the book.  
Both Page: Prints both facing pages of the book.  
5
6
Press OK.  
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Note  
The original must be placed on the scanner glass in order to  
use this feature.  
Booklet copying  
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper, which  
are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in the correct  
sequence.  
2
3
4
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each  
image to fit on the selected paper.  
Press the Advanced tab > Clone Copy.  
Note  
If this option is grayed out, select following options in the  
Basic tab to activate it;  
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided  
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)  
- Paper Supply to Tray.  
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
5
6
7
Press On to activate this feature.  
Press OK.  
2
3
4
5
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
Press the Advanced tab > Booklet.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Press On to activate this feature, and select detailed settings for  
each option.  
Book copying  
Use this feature to copy a book. If the book or magazine is thicker than  
30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the scanner lid open.  
1 Sided Original: Copys on one side of the paper.  
2 Sided Original: Copys on both sides of the paper.  
6
7
Press OK.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Note  
This feature is possible only with A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio,  
JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 and Statement sized paper.  
1
Place the originals face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
Note  
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use  
this feature.  
2
3
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Advanced tab > Book Copy.  
5.8  
<Copying>  
           
8
9
Press OK.  
Cover copying  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock  
taken from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation  
as the main body of the job.  
Watermark copying  
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
You can copy the original with a watermark. For example, you can use it  
when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or  
Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the  
copy.  
2
3
4
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
Press the Advanced tab > Covers.  
Note  
Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto, you  
cannot use this feature.  
5
Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each  
option.  
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
Position: Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front,  
back, or both.  
2
3
4
5
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
Press the Advanced tab > WaterMark.  
Cover Sheet: Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided, 2 sided, or  
blank paper.  
Paper Source: Select the paper tray, where the cover sheet is  
loaded.  
Select WaterMark option.  
6
7
Press OK.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Top Secret: Prints the original with Top Secret text.  
Confidential: Prints the original with Confidential text.  
Urgent: Prints the original with Urgent text.  
Draft: Prints the original with Draft text.  
Transparency copying  
When you prepare transparencies for presentations, use this feature to  
copy the information.  
Custom: The machine prints the original with the customized text.  
Note  
6
7
8
Select 1st Page only, Size, Position, Darkness of options.  
Press OK.  
Before you start this special copy job, set the tray's Paper Types  
and Paper Size to Transparency.(Page 4.9)  
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
2
3
4
5
6
Load the right-sized transparencies into the tray you have set.  
Set the paper type to Transparency.  
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Advanced tab > Transparencies.  
Select Transparencies option.  
No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between  
transparencies.  
Black Sheet: Places a blank sheet between transparencies.  
Printed Sheet: Places the same image on the divider sheets as  
printed on the transparency.  
7
Select media sources, in case you selected either Black Sheet or  
Printed Sheet.  
5.9  
<Copying>  
         
3
4
5
6
7
Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
Press the Advanced tab > Auto Crop.  
Press On to activate this feature.  
Press OK.  
Overlay copying  
If you scan and store the data such as format, you can copy the original  
with the previously stored data.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
Multi-Bin  
You can choose the output mode for printouts.  
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
Note  
You can only use this feature if you have installed optional 2-Bin  
Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Select the tray in Paper Supply.  
Press the Advanced tab > Overlay.  
Press List.  
1
2
3
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Advanced tab > Multi-Bin.  
Select the appropriate option.  
Select a file name.  
Mailbox: Printouts are stacked in the bin you have set. If you set  
the mailbox to Bin3, printouts will be stacked in Bin3.  
Select a overlay option.  
Job Separator: Printouts are stacked in the sequence of job order  
in each bin. However, if there is a vacant bin left, the vacant bin  
has priority, which means prinouts will be stacked there first.  
New: Makes the new overlay. Select options for a new overlay and  
enter the file name.  
Detail: Shows information of the selected overlay.  
Edit: Modifies the name of the selected overlay.  
Delete: Deletes the selected overlay.  
Collator: Printouts are stacked in sets to match the sequence of  
originals in each bin.  
Stacker: Printouts are stacked in bins one-by-one. When Bin1 is  
full, printouts will be stacked in Bin2.  
Apply: Prints the originals with the selected overlay.  
Print: Prints the selected overlay.  
4
Press OK.  
Cancel: Cancels overlay options you have selected.  
Erasing edges  
8
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
If you have selected option New in step 7, the machine starts storing  
the new overlay by pressing the Start button.  
You can copy the original without any edges or margins.  
Auto crop copying  
The machine prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank  
parts like the margin.  
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the  
originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)  
2
3
4
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Image tab > Erase Edge.  
Select the appropriate option.  
1
2
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Border Erase: Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies.  
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
5.10  
<Copying>  
         
Small Original Erase: Erases 0.25" (6mm) from the edge of the  
copies. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use  
this feature.  
4
Select Margin Shift option.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Auto Center: Automatically centers of the paper copy. The original  
must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature. This  
option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass.  
Hole Punch Erase: Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of  
the copies.  
Book Center and Edge Erase: Erases shadows of a binding or  
book edge from the center and side edges of the copies. This  
feature only applies when you do copying a book. (Page 5.8)  
Custom Margin: Adjusts the margin of the left and right, top and  
bottom as you want using arrows. This option supports both on the  
scanner glass or in DADF.  
Note  
5
6
Press OK.  
If you have set the Book Copy option to Off, you cannot use  
Book Center and Edge Erase.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
5
6
Press OK.  
Gray enhance copying  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
When you copy the original in gray scale, use this feature for the better  
quality of copy-output. This feature is only for the copy in gray scale.  
Erasing background images  
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the  
originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)  
This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the  
background, as in newspapers or catalogs.  
2
3
4
5
6
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Image tab > Scan Enhance.  
Press On to activate this feature.  
Press OK .  
1
Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. Or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass.  
2
3
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Image tab > Erase Background.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying  
Adjusting backside images  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is.  
When the original is thin and the back-side imgaes are shown though,  
you can use this feature to remove the back-side image.  
Erase : The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.  
Press OK.  
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the  
originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)  
4
5
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
2
3
4
5
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Image tab > Adjust Backside Image.  
Press On to activate this feature.  
Shifting margins  
You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page.  
Choose the level from 1 to 5. The higher the number, the more the  
back-side images are removed.  
6
7
Press OK .  
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.  
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the  
originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)  
2
3
Press Copy from the Main screen.  
Press the Image tab > Margin Shift  
5.11  
<Copying>  
               
Preparing to fax  
6Faxing (Optional)  
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line  
cord to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a  
connection. The method of making a telephone connection is varies from  
one country to another.  
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax  
machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Note  
If you want to add fax feature to the machine, check the option  
lists (Page 15.1) and contact the purchasing point to order.  
When you purchase a fax kit, install the kit by following the steps  
described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the  
kit. After installing the fax kit, set the machine to use this feature.  
(Page 16.3)  
Sending a fax from a computer  
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine. To  
send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program  
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the  
printer driver. (See Software section.)  
Sending a fax from your Computer  
Note  
You cannot use this machine as a fax via the Internet phone.  
For more information, ask the Internet service provider.  
1
2
3
Open the document to be sent.  
Select Print from the File menu.  
• We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services  
(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting  
telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services  
(DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by  
using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary  
noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet  
quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the  
machine, contact your Internet Service provider for use on DSL  
Micro-filter.  
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different  
depending on your application.  
4
5
6
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window.  
Click Print or OK.  
Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option.  
1
2
3
Line port  
Micro filter  
DSL modem /  
Telephone line  
To use advanced features of the fax, press Machine Setup on  
the control panel and Admin Setting > Setup > Fax Setup.  
(Page 12.5)  
If you want to use a cover page, check Use cover page.  
6.1  
<
Faxing (Optional)>  
         
Check Notify me on delivery, when the fax delivered to the recipients  
successfully.  
: Deletes the last digit entered.  
: Removes all digits of the selected entry.  
7
Click Send.  
Remove: Removes the selected fax number entry.  
Remove All: Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.  
Note  
Address Book: Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly  
from your machine or from SyncThru™ Web Service. (Page 6.9)  
For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax, click  
Help.  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the  
original, both sides of the original.  
Checking a sent fax list  
Resolution: Adjusts the resolution options.  
You can check a sent fax list on your computer.  
Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the  
document box for later use.  
From the Start menu, click Programs or All Programs > Samsung  
Printers > Network PC Fax > Fax Journal. Then, the Fax Journal  
appears with the fax list you have sent.  
Note  
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the  
Document Box chapter. (Page 10.1.)  
Understanding the Fax screen  
Advanced tab  
To use the fax feature, press Fax on the Main screen. If the screen  
displays an other menu, press (  
) to go to the Main screen.  
Job Build: Allows you to send several fax jobs in a single fax  
transmission. (Page 6.5.).  
Note  
Original Size: Selects the size of the original document. Press OK  
If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not  
to update current setting.  
appear on the Main screen.  
Delay Send: Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without  
your intervention. (Page 6.5)  
Basic tab  
Priority Send: Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations.  
(Page 6.5)  
Polling: Used when the receiver requests the document to be  
faxed remotely at sender's absence or vice versa. In order to use  
the polling function, the originals must be previously stored in the  
machine. (Page 6.9)  
Mailbox: Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine  
memory which are ready to be polled. You can use a mailbox on  
the same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine.  
Each mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number, name and  
password. (Page 6.11)  
Back: Returns to the Basic tab.  
Fax number input area: Shows the recipient's fax number using  
the number keypad on the control panel. If you configured the  
phone book, press Individual or Group. (Page 6.8)  
Add No: Lets you add more destinations.  
6.2  
<
Faxing (Optional)>  
           
Image tab  
Sending a fax  
This part explains how to send a fax, and the special methods of  
transmission.  
Note  
When you place the originals, you can use either the DADF or  
the scanner glass. (Page 4.1) If the originals are placed on both  
the DADF and the scanner glass, the machine will read the  
originals on the DADF first, which has higher priority in  
scanning.  
Setting the fax header  
Original Type: Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the  
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number  
on any fax you send.  
original document being scanned. (Page 6.8)  
Darkness: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax.  
(Page 6.8)  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Erase Background: Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns  
as in newspaper originals. (Page 6.8)  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
Color Mode: Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or  
color. (Page 6.8)  
3
4
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Machine ID & Fax No.  
Back: Returns to the Basic tab.  
Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax  
number.  
5
Press OK.  
Sending a fax  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF.  
3
4
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.  
Note  
If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select  
2 Sided with left/right arrows in the Duplex feature.  
6.3  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
               
5
When the cursor is blinking in the input line, enter the fax number  
using the number keypad on the control panel. Or use Address  
Book on the right side of the screen, if you have stored frequently  
used fax numbers.  
6
7
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.  
If the number is which you have dialed recently, press the Redial/  
Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers  
and select a fax number.  
Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the  
remote fax machine.  
Automatic resending  
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer, the  
machine automatically redials the number.  
To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial  
attempts, refer to the next following steps.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
6
7
To add a number, press Add No.  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and  
send a fax to destinations.  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press Redial.  
Note  
• When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop before the  
machine start transmission. Or press the Job Status button,  
and select the job you want to delete, press Delete.  
Select Redial Term and Redial Times.  
• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the  
message asking to place another page.  
• While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email  
at the same time. (Page 7.3)  
Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Place the originals face up into the DADF.  
6
Press OK.  
Redialing the last number  
1
2
3
4
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
Place the originals face up into the DADF.  
Press the Redial/Pause button on the control panel to show ten  
recent fax numbers.  
3
4
5
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.  
Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.  
Press On Hook Dial on the control panel.  
5
Select a fax number in the list and press OK.  
The machine automatically begins to send.  
6.4  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
             
4
5
6
7
Press the Advanced tab > Priority Send.  
Press On.  
Delaying a fax transmission  
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not  
be present.  
Press OK.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Press Start to start the urgent fax job.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF.  
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
Press the Advanced tab > Delay Send.  
Press On.  
Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission  
You can send multiple fax jobs in a single transmission.  
Note  
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the  
segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the  
unexpected users.  
Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display, select Start  
Time with left/right arrows.  
1
2
3
4
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.  
Press On to enable the job build function.  
• If you do not enter Job Name, the machine assigns the job name  
as 'Fax Send Job xxx'. 'xxx' number are set in order.  
Note  
Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent. You  
can set Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than  
the current time. For example, if it is 1:00, then you can set the  
time starting from 1:15. If the set time is incorrect, the warning  
message will appear and the machine resets it to the current  
time.  
- Off: Disables Job Build feature.  
- On: Enables Job Build feature.  
- Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is  
paused with this screen is displayed. Then user can select to keep  
sending fax or stop.  
7
Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.  
Note  
- Delete: Deletes a segment.  
To cancel delaying a fax, press Off before sending is activated.  
- Delete All: Deletes all segments.  
- Send All: Prints all segments.  
- Add Segment: Adds a new segment.  
- Cancel: Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.  
Sending a priority fax  
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of  
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and  
immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished. In  
addition, priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple  
destinations between stations (example, when the transmission to station  
A ends, before transmission to station B begins) or between redial  
attempts.  
5
6
7
8
Press Add Segment.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF.  
Press Start to start scanning a segment for fax job.  
Repeat step 5 to step 7.  
Note  
1
2
3
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
As long as space remains on your device's hard drive, you can  
add segments without any restriction.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF.  
9
After adding segments, press Send All  
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
6.5  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
         
Receiving a fax  
Note  
• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering  
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected  
to EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode  
after a predefined number of rings.  
• If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter,  
set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.  
• If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is  
connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering  
machine, or the outgoing message from the answering  
machine will interrupt your phone conversation.  
This section explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving  
methods available.  
Changing the receive modes  
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a  
fax, the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and  
automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode  
to another mode, refer to next steps.  
• While the machine is receiving a fax, you can not do the copy  
job.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
Receiving faxes manually using an extension  
telephone  
3
4
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Fax Initial Setup > Receive  
Mode.  
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone  
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can  
receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension  
telephone, without going to the fax machine.  
Select the option.  
Telephone: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then  
Start.  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones,  
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the  
press the keys  
fax.  
9
on the extension phone. The machine receives the  
fax reception mode.  
Answering Machine/Fax: Is for when an answering machine  
attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call,  
and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If  
the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine  
automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.  
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from  
the remote machine, try pressing once again.  
9
To change the to, for example, , follow the next steps.  
9
3
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
5
Press OK.  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
Note  
When the memory is full, the machine can no longer receive any  
incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data  
stored in the memory.  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Receive Start Code.  
Select On.  
Receiving manually in Telephone mode  
Press left/right arrows to display number 3.  
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing  
Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine  
begins receiving a fax.  
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/  
Fax mode  
6
Press OK.  
To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT  
socket on the back of your machine. (Page 1.4)  
Receiving in secure receiving mode  
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the  
message as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the  
line, it automatically starts to receive the fax.  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict  
printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure  
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory.  
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
6.6  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
                           
2
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
Adjusting the document settings  
Before sending a fax, you can adjust the document settings, such as  
resolution, darkness, color, duplex and so forth. Refer to explanation of  
this section.  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Secure Receive.  
Select On.  
Enter Passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on  
the control panel.  
Note  
The document setting herein is for only current job. If you want  
to change the default setting on document settings, refer to  
Admin Setting > General tab > Default Settings. (Page 12.2)  
Note  
To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, press Off. In this  
case, the received fax will be printed out.  
Duplex  
Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper  
This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select  
whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.  
Set this duplex feature to save paper. When the machine prints the  
received fax data, it prints them on both sides of the paper.  
Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function.  
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the  
value.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
3
4
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Received Fax Printing >  
Duplex.  
1 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on one side only.  
2 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on both sides.  
Select appropriate option.  
Off: Prints only one side of the paper.  
Resolution  
Long Edge: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding  
will be the long edge.  
Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received  
document.  
Short Edge: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding  
will be the short edge.  
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle  
the values.  
5
Press OK.  
Receiving faxes in memory  
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while  
you are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are  
copying or printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory.  
Then, as soon as you finish copying or printing, the machine  
automatically prints the fax.  
Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This  
option will reduce the transmission time.  
Fine: Recommended for the originals containing with small  
characters, thin lines, or text that was printed using a dot-matrix  
printer.  
Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing with extremely  
fine detail, this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also  
supports a Super Fine resolution.  
Note  
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available.  
The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.  
6.7  
<
Faxing (Optional)>  
                     
Original Type  
Setting up a fax phonebook  
You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a  
document being scanned.  
Use this feature to store destination names, fax numbers and  
transmission settings in your machine. There are two options, Individual  
and Group.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate  
option on the screen and press OK.  
Text: For originals with text or line art.  
Text/Photo: For originals with both text and photographs together.  
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.  
Individual: Stores up to 500 fax numbers. And the fax numbers which  
are stored in Individual work as Speed No..  
Group: Makes groups when you frequently send the same document  
to several destinations. You can store up to 100 group dial numbers.  
Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list  
on the Basic tab of Fax. Dialing Group can be also setup comprising  
of many Individual entries.  
Darkness  
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Darkness. Press the right arrow to enhance  
the darkness degree and press OK.  
The fax numbers, which are stored in Individual, work as Speed No..  
Storing individual phone numbers (Speed No.)  
1
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Individual.  
Erase Background  
You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Erase Background. Press On to activate  
this function and press OK.  
Note  
Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to  
Photo.  
Color Mode  
Edit: Changes the User Name, Speed No., Phone No. and  
Email.  
Press Fax > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select option and OK.  
Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.  
Color: Transmits a fax in color.  
New: Creates the new Speed No. and phone no..  
Delete: Deletes the selected Speed No..  
Search: Searches the fax number which currently stored in  
Individual phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter User  
Name.  
Detail: Shows User Name, Phone No., Email and Included group  
information if it is grouped. (Page 6.8)  
Apply: Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number  
list in the Basic tab.  
Cancel: Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen.  
2
Press New.  
6.8  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
                           
3
Enter the name of the fax number in the User Name field with the  
pop up keyboard, and the fax number in the Phone No. area using  
the number keypad on the control panel.  
7
Press OK to save the numbers.  
Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru™  
Web Service  
You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer  
using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Individual  
1
2
Open the web browser in your computer.  
User Name: Enter the name.  
Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru™ Web Service  
Speed No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If you  
shows.  
want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.  
Phone No.: Enter a fax numbers, only the numbers, with the area  
code if necessary.  
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)  
Press Address Book > Individual.  
Press Add.  
3
4
5
6
Email: Enter an email address.  
4
Press OK.  
Enter Name, Speed No., and Fax Number.  
Press Apply.  
Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)  
1
2
3
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Group.  
Note  
Press New.  
Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an *.csv file.  
Press the input area in Group Name, then the keyboard pops up,  
enter the name.  
Group  
4
Select Speed No. with left/right arrows.  
1
2
Open the web browser in your computer.  
Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru™ Web Service  
shows.  
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)  
Press Address Book > Group.  
Press Add Group.  
Group Name: Enters the group name.  
3
4
5
6
7
Speed No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If you  
want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.  
Enter Group Name and Speed No..  
Add individual ddresses to the fax group.  
Press Apply.  
5
6
Press OK.  
Select an entry from Individual List, and press Add. Repeat this  
step until you added entries you need.  
Using the polling option  
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a  
document. This is useful when the person with the original document is  
not in the office. The person who wants to receive the document, calls the  
machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the  
document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding that has  
the original.  
Note  
Make sure the selected Individual List is copied to the left pane,  
To use this feature, both the sender and receiver must have the  
polling feature.  
Group list.  
6.9  
<
Faxing (Optional)>  
           
The polling process is as follows:  
Storing the originals for polling  
1
2
3
Sender stores the originals in the machine. (Page 6.10)  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document, face down.  
Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when  
requested. (Page 6.11)  
3
4
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
4
Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax.  
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Store.  
5
Press the input area then the pop up keyboard, enter Passcode  
(The four-digit number which you have to inform the receiver). If you  
do not want to set Passcode, enter number 0000 here. Then you  
can store, delete, print and receive a fax for polling without any  
passcode.  
Note  
If you want to use the Mailbox, refer to Storing the originals in  
the Mailbox. (Page 6.12)  
6
Select the Delete On Poll option. If you select Off, the sent fax data  
will be remained in the machine’s memory even after it’s printing. If  
you select On, the fax data will be deleted at the printing point.  
7
8
Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling.  
Give the passcode to the receiver.  
Printing (Deleting) the polling document  
1
2
3
4
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Print (or Delete).  
Enter Passcode  
Press OK.  
6.10  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
         
3
Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field  
are filled with information from the sender.  
Polling a remote fax  
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the remote  
machine.  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Poll from Remote.  
Note  
You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the  
remote machine's Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours.  
4
Press OK.  
Note  
Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a  
specific time within 24 hours.  
Using Mailbox  
3
4
Enter Passcode and destination fax number using the number  
keypad on the control panel. You have to be informed Passcode  
from sender with the remote fax machine.  
You can store the original data in Mailbox, since you are absent and the  
receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you. This feature allows you to  
program up to 15 individual Mailbox. Before you store the originals, the  
Mailbox must be created.  
Press OK.  
Creating Mailbox  
Polling from a remote Mailbox  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the  
Mailbox of on the remote machine. Before you start polling, you must be  
informed of Mailbox No. and Passcode from the sender. (Page 6.11)  
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then  
enter the password and press OK.  
3
4
5
6
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press the down arrow to scroll down, if necessary.  
Press Mailbox Setup.  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Poll from Remote.  
Press Mailbox Configuration. Then the screen displays Mailbox  
List.  
7
Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List.  
6.11  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
                       
8
Press Edit Mailbox.  
5
Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode which are set from Creating  
Mailbox in page 6.11.  
9
Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control  
panel. Up to 20 numbers you can enter.  
6
Press OK.  
10 Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard. It can be either  
Note  
alphabet or number up to 20 digits.  
Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox  
11 Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control  
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Delete, enter  
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and then press OK. When the  
confirmation window appears, press Yes to complete the job.  
panel.  
Note  
If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000, then the  
machine does not ask passcode for using Mailbox, such as  
storing, deleting, printing, receiving.  
Printing a Mailbox  
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Print, enter  
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and press OK.  
12 Set Notification option to On, if you want to be notified when a fax  
is received into Mailbox.  
Faxing to a remote Mailbox  
13 Press OK.  
To fax and store the originals in a recipient's Mailbox in this machine, you  
can use the Send to Remote feature.  
Storing originals in Mailbox  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Since you created the mailbox, you can store originals in it.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document face down.  
1
2
Press Fax from the Main screen.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document faced down.  
3
4
5
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Send to Remote.  
3
4
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.  
Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field  
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Store.  
are filled with information from the receiver.  
6
Press OK.  
6.12  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
             
Printing a report after sending a fax  
Sending a fax in toll save time  
You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is  
successfully completed or not.  
You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a  
telephone fee. If you send a fax after setting this feature, fax data will be  
stored in machine's memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll  
save time.  
Note  
The detailed information is available in advanced setup  
part. (Page 12.15)  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3
4
5
6
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
Press Toll Save.  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
3
4
Press the Print/Report tab > Report > Fax Report > Fax Send  
Report.  
Press On.  
Press On.  
5
Press OK.  
7
Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left/right  
arrows.  
8
9
Press OK.  
Press End Time and set the end date and time with left/right arrows.  
10 Press OK.  
Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job  
You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved  
in memory.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
3
4
5
6
7
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
Press Send Batch.  
Press On.  
Press OK.  
When you send a fax, if a fax number is same as the number in  
delay fax, the machine asks whether you want to add more  
documents to reserved delay fax.  
6.13  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
         
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination  
Note  
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other  
destination by a fax or an email. If you are out of office but have to receive  
the fax, this feature may be useful.  
If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.  
Note  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
• When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail  
server and IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
• If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On, you cannot use a  
fax with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel.  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax  
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Send  
Forward.  
You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other  
destination by faxing.  
6
7
Press On.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
on the display.  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
8
Press OK.  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an  
email  
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Send  
Forward.  
Note  
6
7
Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control  
panel.  
If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.  
Press OK.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other  
destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in  
the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting >  
Receive Forward.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
6
Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option  
using the keyboard on the display.  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set  
the Forward & Print.  
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Receive  
Forward.  
7
Press OK.  
6
Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the  
control panel.  
• If you want to set the start time and end time, select Start Time  
and End Time.  
• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax,  
set the Forward & Print.  
7
Press OK.  
6.14  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
           
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by  
server  
Setting up the end fax tone  
The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received  
can be turned on or off.  
Note  
If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.  
The server setting must be done in SyncThru™ Web Service  
prior to this option on.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
3
4
5
6
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
Press Fax Ending Sound.  
Press On.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
7
Press OK.  
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Send  
Forward.  
Setting up receiving faxes in color  
6
7
Press On.  
This function allows you to recieve faxes in color.  
Press OK.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by  
server  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
Note  
3
4
5
6
7
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
Press Rx Color Printing.  
Press On.  
If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.  
The server setting must be done in SyncThru™ Web Service  
prior to this option on.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
Press OK.  
3
4
5
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Press down arrow on the right side.  
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting >  
Receive Forward.  
6
7
Press Forward.  
Press OK.  
6.15  
<Faxing (Optional)>  
           
Understanding the Scan screen  
7Scanning  
To use the scanning feature, press Scan to Email, Scan to Server or  
Scan to PC on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other menu,  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital  
files.  
press (  
) to go to the Main screen.  
There are two ways to scan originals, one is using the USB cable to  
directly connect the machine with your computer, and the other is using  
the network scan feature which scans and sends to a specific destination  
via the network.  
If you want to use the USB cable to scan originals, refer to the Scanning  
part of Software section. Your machine offers the following ways to scan  
an image using a local connection.  
• Via one of the preset imaging applications. Scanning an image  
launches the selected application, enabling you to control the  
scanning process.  
• Via the SmarThru program supplied with your machine.  
• Via the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver.  
Note  
If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, it means the  
network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™  
Web Service.(Page 13.9)  
If you want to use the network scan feature, press Scan on the display to  
open three options of Scan to Email, NetScan and Scan to Server.  
This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the  
different ways to send the scanned file to the destination.  
Press Scan to Email, Scan to Server or Scan to PC.  
Scan to Email: Scans and sends the scanned output to the  
destination by email. (Page 7.3)  
This chapter includes:  
Scan to Server: Scans and sends the scanned output to the  
destination with SMB and FTP. (Page 7.7)  
Scan to PC: Scans and sends the scanned output to the  
destination with the Samsung Network Scan Manager program.  
(Page 7.6)  
Basic screen  
This section explains the Basic screen of Scan to Email, Scan to Server  
and Scan to PC.  
Scan to Email  
From: Sender's email address.  
To/Cc/Bcc: Recipients' addresses. Cc is for copies to an  
additional recipient and Bcc is same as Cc but without their name  
being displayed in the email.  
7.1  
<
Scanning>  
       
Address Book: Inputs the recipient's address just by pressing  
stored addresses. If you press Search, you can search the  
recipient’s address. If you press Detail, you can see the detailed  
information of selected recipient. If you want to edit or delete a  
recipient, press Edit or Delete. Select recipient’s address and click  
Note  
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the  
Document Box chapter. (Page 10.1.)  
Back: Returns to the previous screen. If network authentication is  
enabled, the log off confirmation message pops-up and closes  
NetScan.  
Apply. Press  
to return to the previous screen. You can store  
frequently used email addresses from your computer using the  
SyncThru™ Web Service. (Page 7.4)  
Subject/Message: Subject and message of the email.  
Scan to Server  
Previous: Returns to the previous screen.  
Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the  
document box for later use.  
Note  
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the  
Document Box chapter. (Page 10.1.)  
Scan to PC  
If the authentication for network appears, you have to enter user name  
and password to enter the Scan to PC screen.  
SMB: Sends the scanned file to SMB. Press SMB for that option.  
FTP: Sends the scanned file to FTP. Press FTP for that option.  
No.: Index number which you entered in SyncThru™ Web  
Service. (Page 7.7)  
Server: Alias name which you entered in SyncThru™ Web  
Service. (Page 7.7)  
Previous: Returns to the previous screen.  
Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the  
document box for later use.  
Note  
PC Application Name: Shows the available application programs  
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the  
from your computer.  
Document Box chapter. (Page 10.1.)  
Start: Moves to the application program you have selected.  
Options tab  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the  
paper (1-Sided), both sides of the paper (2-Sided), or both sides of  
paper but the back side is rotated 180 degrees (2-Sided, Rotate  
Side 2).  
Job Build: Allows you to scan several originals, and then send them  
in a single email or send them to a server(s) at once.  
Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (Page 7.8)  
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.  
Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (Page 7.8)  
7.2  
<
Scanning>  
       
Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the  
original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.  
(Page 7.9)  
Scanning originals and sending through email  
(Scan to Email)  
Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use  
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (Page 7.9)  
You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several  
destinations from the machine by email.  
Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (Page  
7.9)  
Sending a scanned image to several destinations  
as an email attachment  
Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (Page 7.9)  
Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (Page 7.9)  
File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (Page 7.10)  
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass for one sheet of paper.  
Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file  
format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each  
specific purpose. (Page 7.9)  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper  
(1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of paper  
but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).  
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.  
Previous: Returns to the previous screen.  
2
Press Scan to Email.  
Note  
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and  
Password. This message shows only when the network  
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™  
Web Service. (Page 13.9)  
3
4
Set the scan features in the screen. (See page 7.2.)  
Press the Basic screen to enter the email address.  
5
6
7
8
Press the From tab and enter the sender’s email address.  
Press the To/Cc/Bcc tab and enter the Recipient's email address.  
Press the Subject tab and enter the subject of the email.  
Press the Message tab and enter the contents of the email.  
7.3  
<Scanning>  
           
9
If neccessary, press the Options tab and set options for scanning.  
Storing email addresses  
10 Press the Start button to scan and send the file.  
There are two kinds of email addresses - Local on your machine's  
memory and Global on the LDAP server - which differ depending on  
where they are stored. Local is that email addresses are stored in the  
machine's memory, and Global is that email addresses are stored in the  
certain (LDAP) server.  
Note  
While the machine is sending an email, you cannot do the copy  
job either sending a fax.  
Through the SyncThru™ Web Service, you can easily enter and store  
email addresses from your computer.  
Setting up an email account  
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up  
network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Individual  
1
2
3
4
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Click Address Book.  
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. ( See  
Click Add.  
5
Click Settings > Network Settings > Outgoing Mail  
Server(SMTP).  
When the Add E-Mail screen appears, select the Speed No. from 1  
to 500, enter User Name and E-mail Address.  
6
7
Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
7
8
Click Apply.  
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 25.  
Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine  
by pressing Local > the Individual tab.  
8
9
Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require  
authentication.  
Group  
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Access to the SyncThru™ Web Service from your computer.  
10 Click Apply.  
Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book.  
Click Address Book > E-mail Groups.  
Click Add Group.  
Note  
If the authentication method of SMTP server is  
POP3beforeSMTP, check the box next to SMTP Requires  
POP3 Before SMTP Authentication  
Enter Group Name and Speed No..  
Add Individual addresses to the e-mail group.  
Click Apply.  
a. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host  
name.  
b. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default  
port number is 25.  
Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your  
Note  
machine by pressing Group.  
If SMTP server requires SSL/TLS connection, enable Secure E-  
mail Connection with SSL/TLS  
7.4  
<Scanning>  
         
3
When the search is completed, the screen displays the search  
results.  
Global  
Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are  
processed by the LDAP server.  
1
2
3
4
5
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Log in to the web site as an administrator. (see page 13.9.)  
Click Security > Network Security > External Authentication  
Server > LDAP Server.  
6
7
8
Enter LDAP server and Port.  
Enter optional information.  
Click Apply.  
4
5
6
Select the address you want  
Press Apply. Keep selecting addresses as many as you want.  
Press  
to return to Scan to Email.  
Note  
Entering email addresses by the keyboard  
The LDAP server administrator must store the email address  
data. The method of storing is varies depending on the server  
and the operating systems.  
When you press the input field in the From, To, Cc, or subject and  
message input field, the keyboard shows on the display screen.  
The following explanation is the example that you are entering  
Entering email addresses by the address book  
Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address  
book, you can simply enter email addresses.  
1
Press From tab from the Scan to Email.  
1
Press Address Book from To, Cc, Bcc tab of Scan to Email.  
Press Search to specify the search criteria.  
The search window shows.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press the input field.  
Press a, b, c, d, e, f, g.  
Press @.  
2
Press a, b, c.  
Press . and press c, o, m.  
Press OK after finishing all the contents.  
7.5  
<Scanning>  
       
Scan Destination  
Using Samsung Scan Manager  
Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications  
currently linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select  
the program you want to use and click the right arrow and add to  
Front Panel Destination List.  
If you have installed the printer driver, Samsung Scan Manager program  
has installed too. Start Samsung Scan Manager program to find out  
about this program information and the installed scan driver's condition.  
Through this program, you can change scan settings and add or delete  
the folders where scanned documents are saved in your computer.  
Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to  
open scanned image.  
Add Application: Allows you to add application you want to use  
to Available Destination List.  
Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by  
the user in the Available Destination List.  
Note  
Tne Samsung Scan Manager program can only be used in the  
Window and Macintosh system.  
File Format: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be  
saved. You can choose among BMP, JPEG, PDF, and TIFF.  
Note  
The scan data can be encrypted to protect the contents from  
unauthorized access. You can enable the secured scan feature  
from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the SyncThru™  
Web Service as an administrator. (see page 13.9.) And click  
Setting > Machine Settings > Scan > Scan Security > PC  
Scan Security.  
Scan Property  
Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer.  
Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default  
saving folder.  
Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.  
Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color.  
Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size.  
ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does  
not support this option, it will be grayed out.  
1. From the Start menu, click Control Panel > Samsung Scan  
Manager.  
Show Preview: Checking this box allows you to preview applied  
scan options. You can modify the options before scanning.  
Default: Allows you to go back to default options.  
Note  
You can open Samsung Scan Manager by right clicking the  
Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and seleting Scan  
Manager.  
Change Port tab  
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager  
window.  
3. Press Properties.  
4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving  
destination and scan settings, add or delete application program,  
and format files.  
You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port  
tab. (Local or Network)  
5. When setting is done, press OK.  
Set Scan Button tab  
Local Scanner  
Select when your machine is connected via USB or LPT port.  
Network Scanner  
Select when your machine is connected via network port.  
Auto detection on the network: Automatically detects your  
machine.  
IP address: Enter in your machine’s IP address to detect your  
machine.  
7.6  
<
Scanning>  
 
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server  
Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP  
(Scan to Server)  
1
Press Scan to Server.  
Note  
You can scan an image and send it to a server via the SMB or FTP.  
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name  
and Password. This message shows only when the network  
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™  
Web Service. (Page 13.9)  
Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP  
Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the  
scanned file.  
2
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass for one sheet of paper.  
Note  
The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru™  
Web Service, and the setting for FTP server is the same as  
SMB. Apply the same steps for setting up the FTP server.  
3
4
5
Adjust the document settings in the Options tab.  
Select Duplex and Resolution in the Options tab.  
Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in  
the SyncThru™ Web Service. .  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.  
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.  
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Click Address Book.  
Click Add.  
Enter a name and speed number.  
Check Add SMB.  
Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.  
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port  
number is 139.  
6
7
Select the destination SMB server.  
Note  
10 If you want to allow the unauthorized person’s access to SMB  
You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or  
FTP servers.  
server, check Anonymous. By default, this is unchecked.  
11 Enter the login name and password.  
Press Start on the control panel.  
12 Enter the domain name of the SMB server.  
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to  
the specified server.  
13 Enter the path of shared folder in the SMB server for storing the  
scanned images.  
14 Configure Scan folder creating policy, Filing Policy and File  
Name.  
15 Click Apply.  
7.7  
<Scanning>  
               
Feature  
Resolution (dpi)  
File Format  
Changing the scan feature settings  
Scan to Server 100, 200, 300, 600(B/W) PDF, Single-Page  
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,  
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and  
more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but  
after that period, the options will be reset to default values.  
TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,  
JPEG  
100,200,300  
(Gray,Color)  
Original Size  
Duplex  
You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the pre-  
defined size, or putting in the margin value or Auto. If you set this option  
to Auto, the machine senses and determines the size of the original.  
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be  
scanned are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only  
one side of the paper or both sides of the paper.  
Press Scan to Server > the Advanced tab > Original Size.  
Press Scan to Server > the Basic tab > Duplex.  
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Original Size. Use up/  
down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and  
press OK.  
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Duplex. Use left/right  
arrows to toggle the values.  
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.  
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.  
2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both  
sides. But the back is rotated 180 degrees.  
Note  
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load  
the originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not  
detect the original on DADF, automatically changes the option to  
1 Sided.  
Original Type  
Resolution  
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of  
a document being scanned.  
You can adjust document resolution.  
Press Scan to Server > the Image tab > Original Type.  
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Original Type.  
Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Press Scan to Server > the Basic tab > Resolution.  
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Resolution.  
Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the  
clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.  
Commonly, 100 dpi , 200 dpi and 300 dpi resolution are available only  
when Color Mode is set to Color or Gray. The following table shows  
detailed information feature, resolution and file format options.  
Text: For originals that have text or line art.  
Feature  
Resolution (dpi)  
File Format  
Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs  
together.  
Scan to Email  
100, 200, 300, 600(B/W) PDF, Single-Page  
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.  
TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,  
JPEG  
100,200,300  
(Gray,Color)  
Scan to PC  
75, 150, 200, 300, 600,  
PDF, Single-Page  
TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,  
JPEG  
7.8  
<
Scanning>  
                 
Color Mode  
Scan to Edge  
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.  
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the  
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin,  
especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray.  
But if you scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the  
machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals.  
Press Scan to Server > the Image tab > Color Mode  
.
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Color Mode  
.
Or . Press Scan to PC > the Image tab > Color Mode  
.
Press Scan to Server > the Image tab > Scan to Edge.  
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Scan to Edge.  
Select On and press OK.  
Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Quality  
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher  
quality you select a larger file size you get.  
Press Scan to Server > the Output tab > Quality.  
Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for  
each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.  
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Quality.  
Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per  
pixel.  
Note  
When you set Color Mode to Gray, the Quality option is  
grayed out.  
Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.  
Scan Preset  
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan  
job.  
Press Scan to Server > the Output tab > Scan Preset.  
Darkness  
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Scan Preset .  
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your  
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the  
output darker.  
Press Scan to Server > the Image tab > Darkness.  
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Darkness.  
Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press OK.  
Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal  
quality documents.  
High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with  
the largest file size.  
Erase Background  
Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file  
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
size of the output.  
OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect  
the highest quality images.  
Press Scan to Server > the Image tab > Erase Background  
.
Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file  
size of output is small.  
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Erase Background  
.
Select On and press OK.  
Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.  
7.9  
<
Scanning>  
                         
3
Press On.  
File Format  
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.  
Press Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Options tab > File  
Format. .  
4
Select an encryption level.  
PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.  
- Low (RC4, 40 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 3.0 or later version.  
You can add a Digital Signature to the PDF with the certification. To  
add the Digital Signature, you have to create the certification from  
the SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web  
Service as an administrator. (See page 13.9.) And click Setting >  
Machine Settings > Scan > Scan Security > Digital Signature in  
PDF.The Digital Signature can be used in the Scan to Server  
feature.  
You also can create a PDF Encryption that is encrypted to protect  
the contents from unauthorized access. You can set the encryption  
level, password, and access permission such as reading, printing,  
or modifying, etc. The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to  
Server feature. (See page 7.10.)  
- High (RC4, 128 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 5.0 or later  
version.  
- High (AES, 128 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 7.0 or later  
version.  
5
6
Enter the Owner Password to get a whole right about the PDF.  
Enter the User Password to get an Access Permission set by the  
Access Permission menu below.  
7
Set the Access Permission in printing or modifying. This  
configuration will affect the users accessed with the User  
Password.  
Single-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), and several originals are scanned as an each individual  
TIFF file.  
8
9
Check Extract text and graphics to give users permission to  
extract text or graphics.  
Multi-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.  
Press OK.  
JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.  
Note  
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been  
selected for Color Mode.  
PDF Encryption  
To encrypt your PDF files, you need to set up parameters for the  
encryption level, password, and access permission, etc.  
Note  
The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to Server  
feature.  
1
2
Press Scan to Server > the Options tab > File Format > PDF.  
Press PDF Encryption.  
7.10  
<Scanning>  
         
8 Basic printing  
This chapter explains common printing tasks.  
Printing a document  
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or  
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary  
depending on the application you use.  
For details about printing, see Software section.  
Canceling a print job  
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the  
printer group in Windows, delete the job as follows:  
1
2
Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and  
Sound > Printers.  
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Device and Printers.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >  
Device and Printers.  
3
4
For Windows 2000, XP, 2003 ,Vista and 2008, double-click your  
machine.  
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your  
printer icon > context menus > See what’s printing .  
Note  
If See what’s printing item has X mark, you can select other  
printer drivers connected with selected printer.  
From the Document menu, select Cancel.  
Note  
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the  
printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.  
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel.  
8.1  
<Basic printing>  
       
USB Print: You can directly print files stored on an USB memory  
device. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files.  
(Page 9.6)  
9Using USB flash memory  
This chapter explains how to use an USB memory device with your  
machine.  
Scan to USB: You can specify image size, file format, or color  
mode for each scanning to USB job. (Page 9.2)  
This chapter includes:  
Plugging in an USB memory device  
The USB memory port on the side of your machine is designed for  
USB V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices.  
You must use an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type  
connector.  
Use only a metal/shielded  
USB memory device.  
About USB memory  
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities  
to give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded  
music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files  
you want to store or move.  
Note  
There are two USB plug types.  
You can do the following on your machine using an USB memory device:  
• Scan documents and save them on an USB memory device.  
• Print data stored on an USB memory device.  
• Format the USB memory device.  
Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the side of  
your machine.  
Understanding the USB screen  
To use the USB memory device, press USB or Scan to USB on the Main  
screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press (  
) to go to the  
Main screen.  
Note  
When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on  
your machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.  
USB Format: You can delete image files stored on an USB  
memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the  
device.  
9.1  
<
Using USB flash memory>  
         
Cautions  
Scan to USB  
• Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in  
operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. This may  
damage your machine.  
Basic tab  
• If your USB memory device has certain features (example,  
security key, security partition, booting disk, password settings  
and so forth), do not use the USB memory device with your  
machine. The files stored in the USB memory device may be  
corrupted, or the machine may not automatically detect it. For  
details about these features, see device’s User’s Guide.  
Scanning to an USB memory device  
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB  
memory device. When you scan a document, the machine uses the  
default settings such as the resolution. You can also customize your own  
scan setting. (Page 9.3)  
Name: The folder names on the USB memory device.  
Date: Tha date which folders are made.  
If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security key,  
security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth), do not  
use the USB memory device with your machine. The files stored in the  
USB memory device may be corrupted, or the machine may not  
automatically detect it. For details about these features, see device’s  
User’s Guide.  
Select: Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name.  
New Folder: Makes a new folder on the USB memory device.  
Detail: Views the details of currently selected folder or file.  
Rename: Renames the folder or file name.  
Delete: Deletes the folder on the USB memory device.  
Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the  
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of  
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).  
Scanning  
1
2
3
Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the rear  
side of your machine.  
Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.  
File Name: Names a file before you scan a document by just  
clicking this field.  
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original  
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Press Scan to USB from the Main screen.  
Or, press USB > Scan to USB  
Advanced tab  
4
5
6
7
Select the appropriate option. (Page 9.3)  
Press OK.  
Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning.  
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory  
device from the machine.  
Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (Page 9.4)  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
9.2  
<
Using USB flash memory>  
           
Image tab  
Changing the scan feature settings  
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,  
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and  
more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but  
after that period, the options will be reset to default values.  
Duplex  
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be  
scanned are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only  
one side of the paper or both sides of the paper.  
Press Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Duplex.  
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Basic tab > Duplex.  
Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.  
Original Type: Selects whether the original is text, text/photo or  
photo. (Page 9.4)  
Color Mode: Selects the color options of the scan output. If the  
original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.  
(Page 9.4)  
Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use  
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (Page 9.4)  
1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.  
Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns.  
(Page 9.5)  
2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.  
2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both  
sides. But the back is rotated 180 degrees.  
Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (Page 9.5)  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Note  
Output tab  
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load  
the originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not  
detect the original on DADF, automatically changes the option to  
1 Sided.  
Resolution  
You can adjust document resolution.  
Press Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Resolution.  
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Basic tab > Resolution.  
Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the  
clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.  
Quality: Adjusts the scan quality of the scan output. (Page 9.5)  
Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as  
file format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each  
specific purpose. (Page 9.5)  
File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (Page 9.5)  
File Policy: You can choose the policy for generating file name  
before you proceed with the scan job through USB. (Page 9.6)  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
9.3  
<
Using USB flash memory>  
             
Original Size  
Color Mode  
The machine senses and determines the size of the original.  
Press Scan to USB > the Advanced tab > Original Size.  
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Advanced tab > Original Size.  
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.  
Press Scan to USB > the Image tab > Color Mode  
.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Image tab > Color Mode  
.
Use up/down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate  
Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
option and press OK.  
Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for  
each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.  
Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per  
Original Type  
pixel.  
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of  
a document being scanned.  
Press Scan to USB > the Image tab > Original Type.  
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Image tab > Original Type.  
Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.  
Darkness  
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your  
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the  
output darker.  
Text: For originals that have text or line art.  
Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs  
together.  
Press Scan to USB > the Image tab > Darkness.  
Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.  
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Image tab > Darkness.  
Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press OK.  
9.4  
<
Using USB flash memory>  
                   
Erase Background  
Scan Preset  
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning  
colored paper or newspaper originals.  
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.  
Press Scan to USB > the Output tab > Scan Preset.  
Press Scan to USB > the Image tab > Erase Background  
.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Output tab > Scan Preset.  
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Image tab > Erase Background  
.
Select the appropriate option and press OK.  
Off: Disables this feature.  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the  
background is.  
Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.  
Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal  
quality documents.  
Scan to Edge  
High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with  
the largest file size.  
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the  
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin,  
especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray.  
But if you scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the  
machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals.  
Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file  
size of the output.  
OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect  
the highest quality images.  
Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file  
size of output is small.  
Press Scan to USB > the Image tab > Scan to Edge.  
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Image tab > Scan to Edge.  
Select On and press OK.  
Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.  
File Format  
Quality  
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.  
Press Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Format.  
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher  
quality you select a larger file size you get.  
Press Scan to USB > the Output tab > Quality.  
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Output tab > File Format.  
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Output tab > Quality.  
PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.  
Note  
Single-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), and several originals are scanned as an each individual  
TIFF file.  
The Quality cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for  
Color Mode.  
Multi-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File  
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.  
JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.  
BMP: Scans original in BMP format.  
Note  
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been  
selected for Color Mode.  
9.5  
<
Using USB flash memory>  
                     
File Policy  
Printing from a USB memory device  
You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed  
with the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same  
name when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.  
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print  
TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF and PRN files.  
Direct Print option supported file types:  
Press Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Policy.  
• PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are  
compatible.  
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Output tab > File Policy.  
• PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when  
you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file,  
rather than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion  
can be printed directly from USB memory. See Software section to  
learn how to create a PRN file.  
• BMP: BMP Uncompressed  
• TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline  
• JPEG: JPEG Baseline  
• PDF: PDF 1.4 and below  
Rename: If the USB memory already has the same file name  
when you entered a new file name, the file will be saved as a  
different file name that is automatically programmed.  
Overwrite:If the USB memory already has the same file name  
when you entered a new file name, the previous file will be  
recorded over with the new file.  
If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security key,  
security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth), do not  
use the USB memory device with your machine. The files stored in the  
USB memory device may be corrupted, or the machine may not  
automatically detect it. For details about these features, see device’s  
User’s Guide.  
To print a document from a USB memory device:  
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory porton the rear  
side of your machine.  
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data  
stored on it.  
2
3
Press USB from the Main screen.  
Use up/down arrows until the file you want appears. Select the file  
name.  
If there is a folder, select folder name and press Select.  
Press USB Print.  
4
5
Press Start on the control panel to begin printing  
9.6  
<Using USB flash memory>  
       
Understanding the Document Box screen  
10Using Document Box  
To use the Document Box feature, press Document Box on the Main  
This chapter explains how to use Document Box with your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press (  
) to go to the  
Main screen.  
About Document Box  
The Document Box feature makes it possible to store scanned data to the  
hard drive. Users can send the stored data to various destinations such  
as print, fax, e-mail, or an FTP/SMB server. The Document Box provides  
three types of boxes: public (  
) , secured (  
) , and common  
(
) . The public box can be created by all users and all users can store  
data to public boxes. The secured box can be created with password by  
all users. This means that the only users who know the password can  
access to the box and store their data. A common box is provided by  
default. Users cannot create, edit, and delete the common box. When a  
user needs to store a job that is not assigned to a box (i.e., fax receiving  
or PC printing in store mode), the data will be stored in the common box  
by default.  
Document Box Screen  
You can also see the System Box tab from the Document Box screen.  
The System Box is used for temporary data backup such as printing in  
delayed mode, printing proof page.  
s
-
User Box tab: Create the box where you can save documents such  
as the file you have printed, sent by email, or scanned. When you  
create a box, you can set the password to secure your box. The box  
with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it is called  
public box.  
- System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you  
cannot modify them.  
- Type: Shows the box is secured or not.  
- Box Name: Shows the box name.  
- Owner: Shows the user name of a box.  
- Date: Shows the date of a box created.  
- File: Shows the number of total files in the box.  
- Add: Lets you add more boxes.  
-
Delete: Deletes the selected box.  
- Edit: Lets you modify a box name and an owner name.  
Detail: Shows box information.  
-
- Report: Prints the information about the documents inside the  
selected box.  
- Search: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.  
- Enter: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.  
10.1  
<
Using Document Box>  
         
Box Adding Screen  
Document List Screen  
You can create a new box to store your scanned data. To add a new  
You can enter a document box by clicking Enter from the Document Box  
Document Box, press Add on the Document Box screen.  
screen, you can use the stored documents again.  
Note  
The following are some constraints about the document box.  
You can create maximum 100 document boxes.  
• A document box can contain up to 200 stored-documents.  
• The length of a box name is limited to 20 characters.  
• Common (  
) box is already created by default.  
- Document Name: Shows the document’s name.  
- Owner: Shows the user name of a document.  
- Date: Shows the date of a document stored.  
- Page: Shows the number of total pages in the document.  
- Add From Scan: Lets you add a new document from scanning.  
-
Detail: Shows a document’s information.  
- Search: Searches a file with a document name or an owner name.  
- Box Name: Enter a box name.  
- Edit: Lets you to modify a document name and an owner name.  
- Owner: Enter the user name of the box's owner.  
- Secured Box: Check to make a secured-type box.  
- New Password: Enter a new password to access the box.  
- Confirm Password: Enter the password again.  
-
Delete: Deletes the selected document.  
- Copy: Copies a selected document to another document box.  
- Move: Moves a selected document to another document box.  
- Combine: Merge documents located in two or more boxes.  
- Send To: Sends the selected document(s) to a destination such as  
e-mail, fax, server, or USB.  
Edit a Box Screen  
You can modify a box name or an owner name. To modify a Document  
Box, select a box from the Document Box list and press Edit.  
- Print: Prints the selected document(s) out.  
- Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
- Box Name: Enter a new box name.  
- Owner: Enter a user name of a box.  
10.2  
<
Using Document Box>  
     
Storing documents during copy, scan, fax  
function  
Storing documents to Document box  
This machine allows you to store the scanned data on the hard drive.  
During copying, scanning, or faxing, you can save the scanned originals  
to Document Box in your machine.  
Storing documents from document box  
1
2
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document, face down.  
You can scan orignals directly from Document Box menu.  
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner  
glass with a single original document, face down.  
Press Copy > the Basic tab > Saving to box.  
or press Scan to Email (Scan to Server) > Saving to box.  
or press Fax > the Basic tab > Saving to box.  
2
3
4
Press Document Box from the Main screen.  
Press a document box with which you need to store a document.  
Press Enter.  
3
Enter the file name in the File Name field with the pop up keyboard.  
Then press OK.  
5
Press Add From Scan.  
4
5
Select a destination box and press OK.  
Press Start from the control panel to begin a job.  
6
7
Set the scan settings.  
Press Start to begin scanning.  
10.3  
<Using Document Box>  
       
Workflow Screen  
11 Using Standard Workflow  
Favorite Tab  
This chapter explains how to use standard workflow with your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Favorite workform is a shortcut of public or private workform. You can  
select a frequently-used public or private workform, and then the  
workform appears on the favorite workform tab.  
Note  
Fax input workform is automatically executed when receiving  
fax. Therefore fax input workforms cannot be registered to a  
favorite workform.  
About Standard Workflow  
Standard Workflow is a feature for users to conveniently operate jobs  
with pre-arranged task sets called workform. Standard Workflow makes  
it possible to execute multiple jobs in a single session by defined the job  
workform. Once you create a workform, you can reuse the same  
workflow only with one-touch operation.  
Input  
Transmit  
• Email  
• Scan  
• Document Box  
• Fax  
• FTP/SMB server  
• Document Box  
• Print  
- Execute: Start the job defined in the workform.  
My Workform and Public Workform Tab  
• Fax  
Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen  
To use the Standard Workflow feature, press Standard Workflow on  
the Main screen.  
Note  
To switch to the other display screen, press the left or right  
arrow on the display screen.  
- Type: Shows the workform is locked by the creator or not.  
- Name: Shows the workform name.  
- Input: Shows the workform’s input module name.  
11.1  
<Using Standard Workflow>  
         
- Transmit: Shows the workform’s transmit module name. If two or  
more modules are added in transmit workform, this column displays  
Multi without any icon.  
Transmit Tab  
- Properties: Shows the workform’s perperties.  
- Create: Creates a new private workform.  
-
Delete: Deletes the selected workform.  
- Edit: Lets you to modify a workform.  
Detail: Shows detailed workform information.  
-
- Search: Searches a workform with a workform name.  
- Task: Imports a workform from USB, export a workform to USB,  
copy or move a workform to public workform. It also makes a  
shortcut in favorite workform tab by clicking Set to Favorite WF or  
removes the shortcut by clicking Set to Normal WF.  
- Transmit: Shows the workform’s transmit module name.  
- Execute: Start the job defined in the workform.  
- Status: shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to  
set every mandatory items of every assigned transmit modules.  
Workform Creating Screen  
Note  
You can create a new workform. To add a new workform, press Create  
on the My Workform or Public Workform tab.  
After you do fill out all mandatory items, the Save & Execute  
and Save button are enabled.  
Note  
-
Add Module: Add transmit module(s).  
You can create maximum 100 workforms.  
Note  
Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are  
correctly configured for each module.  
Input Tab  
-
-
Delete: Deletes the selected module.  
Settings: Configures the setting values for the module.  
- Previous: Goes to the next tab.  
- Next: Goes to the next tab.  
Properties Tab  
- Input: Shows the workform’s input module name.  
- Status: shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to  
set every mandatory items of the assigned input module.  
Note  
After you do fill out all mandatory items, the Save & Execute  
and Save button are enabled.  
-
Settings: Configures the setting values for the module.  
- Next: Goes to the next tab.  
- Workform Name: Sets the workform name.  
- Delay Start: Schedule the start date and time to start.  
- Expired: Sets the expire date.  
- Secured: Locks the workform with password protection.  
- Previous: Goes to the next tab.  
11.2  
<Using Standard Workflow>  
 
Approval feature  
Various Operations with Workform  
Before executing the transmit module, you can get approval from an  
administrator.  
User can operate various jobs with workforms. The following items show  
some example cases.  
Note  
Make sure that you enabled Approve in Machine Setup >  
Admin Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow  
Management. (See page 12.14.)  
Scan to multi-destination  
You can scan a document once and send it to multiple destinations such  
as email, SMB/FTP server, document box, and print.  
Note  
Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are  
correctly configured for each module.  
• Email, Server: See page 7.7.  
Fax forwarding  
You can forward the received fax to another destinations. To forward a  
fax, your machine checks caller’s ID that the fax service provides. When  
the caller is also Samsung’s fax machine, your machine checks the fax  
number that the user defined for the machine information.  
Note  
Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup >  
Admin Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow  
Management. (See page 12.14.)  
When you need to forward different destination for each caller, you can  
create several workforms for each caller’s ID.  
Auto redirection  
If the fax transmission failed, the machine re-sends the fax image to the  
user’s email address.  
Note  
Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup >  
Admin Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow  
Management. (See page 12.14.)  
Delayed start feature  
You can schedule the job’s execution time by setting Delay Start in  
Properties tab when you creating a workform.  
Notification feature  
You can notify the job processing result to an email.  
Note  
Make sure that you enabled Complete Notification in Machine  
Setup > Admin Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow  
Management. (See page 12.14.)  
11.3  
<Using Standard Workflow>  
             
Machine Status screen  
12Machine status and  
advanced setup  
Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status.  
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine,  
and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup. Please read  
this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.  
This chapter includes:  
Supplies Life tab: Displays the remainders or the usage count of  
the machine supplies. Use up/down arrows to switch screens.  
Machine Info. tab: Displays the detailed information about the  
machine, and some options allows for validating your machine.  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Admin Setting screen  
Gives you access to detailed machine settings.  
Note  
Machine Setup  
When you press Admin Setting, a login message appears. If  
the administrator set the password, you have to enter the  
password every time you want to use Admin Setting.  
(Page 3.5)  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Select the appropriate item for your occasion.  
General tab: Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as  
Machine Status: Shows the current machine status.  
location, date, time, and more. (Page 12.2)  
Admin Setting: Allows administrator to set up the machine. When  
you press Admin Setting, login message pops up. Enter  
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)  
Setup tab: Sets the values for fax, network, login, and an option to  
service for enabling the feature listed on the screen.  
Print/Report tab: Prints configuration or font list and displays a  
Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their  
report of machine features. (Page 12.15)  
status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.  
Back: Returns to the previous screen.  
Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of  
printouts depending on the paper size and type.  
12.1  
<Machine status and advanced set-  
               
Browsing the machine’s status  
General settings  
You can browse the machine information and validate some features of  
the machine.  
Before you get ready to using the machine, it is recommended to set up  
the machine parameters.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Machine Status > the Machine Info. tab.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)  
3
Press the General tab.  
Description  
Machine Details  
This option shows the customer support  
information on the email address and the  
phone number you stored from Admin  
Setting. Also, you can check the machine's  
serial number, or the hardware and software  
information specification.  
Option  
Description  
Device Info  
The sub-options available are Service Center  
Registration and Contact Info. You may enter  
information on service center and purchasing  
point.  
Print/Report  
Tray Status  
You can print various helpful and informative  
reports such as System Report, Fax Report  
and Scan Report. (Page 13.1)  
Date & Time  
You can set the date and time. (Page 3.5)  
Default Settings  
Default Window: Set the first window that  
will appear on the display screen after turning  
on the machine or waking up from the Power  
Save. For example, if you select Fax as a  
default window, the first window will be the  
Basic tab of the Fax feature. In case you  
want to show ID Copy as a default window,  
you need to enable this feature in Default  
Option previously.  
The screen shows the trays installed on  
your machine, and their current  
configurations. Select the tray and Edit to  
change the settings for paper type and size.  
Usage Counters  
You can view the amount of each category  
that your machine has printed so far. To  
print this report, see page 12.15.  
Default Option: Changes all the default  
values for copying, faxing, emailing, scanning  
and paper at once. (Page page 3.7)  
Home: Allows user to arrange each function  
in the display screen.  
Note: Depending on the optional kit you  
installed or the category you selected, the  
selectable options on the display screen may  
differ.  
Measurements  
This option lets you change the measurement  
unit to use (mm or inch), and set the numeric  
separation (comma or period).  
12.2  
<Machine status and advanced set-  
                   
Option  
Timers  
Description  
Option  
Description  
The machine cancels a printing job if data does  
not be received in specific time.  
Output Options  
Output Options is for, when the staples run  
out, you to let the machine stop processing and  
wait to refill the staples or continue the job. If  
you set Within Job Offsetting to On, the  
output paper is placed and sorted by job unit.  
You can also select stapling position for  
landscape printing with Landscape Stapling  
Postion.  
System Timeout: The machine returns to the  
default value after certain time the machine  
waits. You can set a time for maximum 10  
minutes.  
Held Job Timeout: The machine holds a job  
for a specific time period. You can set a time  
period for at least an hour.  
Contention  
Management  
This feature lets you to select the priority  
between copy jobs and print jobs.  
Language  
It allows you to change the language that  
appears on the touch screen.  
Priority: Set the priority by numbering the  
job. The machine starts from the least to the  
highest number in order.  
First In, First Out: The machine does an  
asked job in order.  
Power Saver  
You can reduce energy consumption by setting  
these features. Power Saver has two options,  
first Low Power Save turns off the scanner  
lamp under the glass. Power Save turns off the  
fans within the machine except a core fan for  
the fuser unit. (Page 3.6)  
Sound  
You can adjust the loudness of the machine  
sound. Press Fault to adjust the machine's  
error sound. Select Conflict if you pressed the  
wrong option. Press Selection to sound  
whenever you press the selection from your  
touch screen.  
Tray  
Management  
This feature allows you to select the tray and  
paper you use for a printing job. Paper size,  
paper type, and paper color options are  
adjusted here. Tray Confirmation Message is  
to activate the window asking whether you set  
the paper size and type for the just opened tray.  
Supplies  
Management  
The machine gives you the notification of the  
drum and toner to reorder, and resets the used  
fuser counter, bias transfer roller, feed roller and  
document feeder friction pad counter.  
Auto Tray Switch: If tray1 and tray2 are filled  
with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty  
and this option is On, then the machine  
continues printing with paper in tray2.  
Auto Continue: When the paper is  
mismatched, meaning that tray1has filled with  
the letter size paper, but the printing job  
needs A4 size paper, the machine will wait for  
30 seconds to paper in tray1 with proper  
sized paper. After 30 seconds, the machine  
automatically starts printing with Letter sized  
paper.  
Machine Test  
The machine prints the test image patterns  
using Image Quality Test Patterns.  
Manual Image  
Overwrite  
You can set the machine to delete previous job  
information on HDD as you store new job  
information. To activate this feature, go to  
Admin Setting > the Setup tab > Optional  
Service and set the Manual Image Overwrite  
option to Enable. After activating this feature  
you can overwrite a HDD by pressing Start in  
the display.  
Paper Substitution: When the paper is  
mismatched, this option sets the machine  
print A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or  
vice versa.  
HDD Spoolling  
To spool documents in HDD for the network  
printing, select On.  
Wide A4: It is useful when printing in DOS  
mode. This option prints 80 charactors in a  
line, which printing 78 charactors in a line is  
usual in DOS mode.  
Altitude  
Adjustment  
Print quality is affected by atmospheric  
pressure, which atmospheric pressure is  
determined by the height of the machine above  
sea level. This feature lets you adjust the  
altitude in a height district. Higher altitude  
location need to set this feature to High 3,  
which affects print quality.  
12.3  
<Machine status and advanced set-  
                 
Option  
Description  
Option  
Stamp  
Description  
You can print optional information such as ID,  
Machine Information, Date & Time,  
Comment, and Page Number, on the output  
paper for tracking.  
Stored Job File  
Policy  
You can choose the file policy for generating file  
name before you proceed with the job through  
HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same  
name when you entered a new file name, you  
can rename or overwrite it.  
Items: Select item(s) to print on each paper.  
Position: Decide the position to stamp  
either Top or Bottom of paper.  
Appearance: Decide the appearance of the  
text either Opaque or Transparent. When  
you select Opaque, the text background  
color is filled with opaque white.  
Rename: If the HDD already has the same  
file name when you entered a new file name,  
the file will be saved as a different file name  
that is automatically programmed.  
Overwrite: If the HDD already has the same  
file name when you entered a new file name,  
the previous file will be recorded over with the  
new file.  
Autocomplete  
You can activate (or deactivate) the  
autocompletion feature that provides a list of  
possibilities completing your text for you.  
Activation: Select On to activate the  
autocomplete feature. When you type more  
than two letters into the textbox to enter a  
new email address or a new accounting ID,  
autocomplete texts will be provided. You can  
press the drop-down button and select text  
from the extended list.  
Country  
You can change the country, then some of the  
values for fax and paper size will be changed  
automatically for your country. After installing  
the fax kit, you must change the country.  
Home Window  
Background  
To change the background image of the  
machine's LCD UI to suit user’s preference,  
press Custom, select a customized  
background image file on the list, and then  
press Load.  
The text closest to your entryis  
displayed in gray completing your entry  
but is not entered into the textbox. To  
actually enter the text, you have to select  
text from the drop-down list.  
Users can register their own background image  
from SyncThru™ Web Service. Click Settings  
> Machine Settings > System > Home  
Window Customization, and add your images  
on the list.  
Sort: Sorts the autocomplete list order by  
Most frequently used, Recently entered,  
or Alphabetical order.  
Clear DB: Clears the autocomplete  
database.  
Multi-Bin  
You can set the default mode for multi-output  
bin from the following options:  
Mailbox: Stacks the printouts in a bin that the  
user selects from the output options in the  
printer driver. You can modify each bin’s name  
from Rename. You also can merge two or  
more bins from Link Setup. By using Default  
Setup, you can assign each job’s default bin  
such as bin 2 for copy job, bin 4 for fax job,  
etc.  
Job Seperator: Stacks the printouts in each  
seperated bin in sequence by job.  
Collator: Stacks the printouts in the same  
order as the originals.  
Stacker: Stacks the printouts in bins one-by-  
one. When bin 1 is full, printouts will be  
stacked in bin 2.  
You can only use this feature if you have  
installed optional 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin  
Mailbox.  
12.4  
<Machine status and advanced set-  
Copy Setup  
Fax Setup  
For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.  
This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax  
system. You can change the default settings for your preferences and  
needs.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
password and press OK.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
3
Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup.  
password and press OK.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.  
Description  
Page Number  
If you select this option On, each copy will include  
Note  
the page number on the bottom of each page.  
The fax options are different from country to country  
depending on the international communication regulatory. If  
the display screen does not show or gray out some of the  
fax options explained herein, it means that the grayed out  
function does not supported in your communication  
environment.  
Option  
Description  
Machine ID &  
Fax No  
Enter the machine ID name and fax number  
which will be printed at the top of each page.  
Receive Start  
Code  
This feature works best when you are using an  
extension telephone connected to the EXT  
socket on the back of your machine. You can  
receive a fax from someone you are talking to  
on the extension telephone, without going to the  
fax machine. (Page 6.6)  
Error Correction  
Mode  
It helps with poor line quality and makes sure  
any faxes you send are properly transmitted to  
any other ECM-equipped fax machines.  
Sending a fax using ECM may take more time.  
12.5  
<Machine status and advanced set-  
                 
Option  
Description  
You can set Receive Mode for Telephone  
or Answering Machine/Fax, and Dial Mode at  
either Tone or Pulse.  
Option  
Description  
Fax Initial Setup  
,
Fax  
Prefix Dial  
This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to  
five digits. This number will be dialed before any  
automatic number is dialed. User may set this  
to access a PABX(example 9) or area code  
number (example 02).  
When you select Answering Machine/Fax,  
you can receive a fax while the line is being  
used by the answering machine. (Page 6.6)  
Junk Fax Setup  
The machine does not accept faxes sent from  
remote stations if their numbers are stored in  
the memory as junk fax numbers. You can enter  
a maximum of 10 junk fax numbers. Press  
Junk Fax Setup and Edit, then, enter the fax  
numer. If you have set Caller ID enabled, you  
can browse the last received fax numbers and  
select a fax number from the list.  
Contact your local telephone company for Dial  
Mode setting information.  
Ring to Answer  
Receive Header  
Secure Receive  
You can specify the number of times the  
machine rings before answering an incoming  
call.  
Use this option to automatically print the page  
number, date and time of fax reception at the  
bottom of each page.  
Ring Volume  
This feature adjusts the ring volume. When you  
select Off, the machine does not ring.  
You may need to prevent your received faxes  
from being accessed by unauthorized people.  
This feature restricts printing of received faxes  
when the machine is unattended. If you select  
this option to On, all incoming faxes go into  
memory.  
Dial Tone  
Volume  
When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax,  
you can hear a specific tone. To adjust the tone  
volume, you can use this feature.  
Mailbox Setup  
Document Policy: You can set the document  
stored in Mailbox to delete or retain  
documents after. Select On of each option to  
delete, Off to remain the data.  
Mail Configuration: You can create, edit, or  
delete Mailbox. Enter Mailbox ID, Mailbox  
Name, Mailbox Passcode by pressing  
options. (Page 6.11)  
A four-digit Passcode is used when you want  
to print out received faxes in memory.  
(Page 6.6)  
• When receiving a fax containing pages longer  
than the paper loaded in the tray, the machine  
can reduce the size of the original to fit the size  
of the paper loaded in the machine. If this  
feature is set to Off, the machine cannot  
reduce the original to fit onto one page. The  
original will be divided and printed in actual  
size on two or more pages. If you set this  
option to On and set the discard size to 10 mm  
and the received data is longer then the  
currently set paper in the tray, the machine  
minuses the specified segment set as the  
discard size.  
Received Fax  
Printing  
Note: If you set the Notification option to On,  
you are notified when a fax is received in  
Mailbox. (Page 6.11)  
Output Tray  
Toll Save  
This feature lets you select the paper tray to  
use for receiving a fax.  
Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save  
time for saving. (Page 6.13)  
Send Batch  
The machine asks you whether you want to add  
the documents to the reserved delay fax, if the  
fax number you have dialed is same as the  
delay fax number. (Page 6.13)  
You can set the machine to print out the fax on  
both sides of the paper, or stapled. (Page 6.7)  
Redial  
The machine can automatically redial a remote  
fax machine, if it was busy. You can set the  
number of redial attempts and an interval  
between attempts. Selecting 0 for Redial  
Times means that the machine will not use this  
feature.  
Fax Forward  
Settings  
You can forward a sent or received fax to other  
destination by a fax or an email. (Page 6.14)  
Fax Ending  
Sound  
This setting selects whether the end fax tone is  
on or off. (Page 6.15)  
Rx Color  
Printing  
This function allows you to recieve faxes in  
color. (Page 6.15)  
Speaker Volume  
This controls the sound when a fax actually  
starts to transfer data. If this option is On, the  
machine sounds from a fax starts until a fax  
finishes. With Comm. the machine sounds only  
until the communication is succeeded. No  
sound with Off option.  
Caller ID  
If you have set this option, the machine  
remembers the last twenty fax numbers.  
12.6  
<Machine status and advanced set-  
Option  
Description  
Network Setup  
IPv6  
Machine supports IPv6 addresses for network  
printing and managements.  
You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before  
doing that, you must have the information concerning the type of network  
protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting  
to use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine  
network.  
IPv6 Activate: When you select On, the Host  
Name and Link-Local Address will  
automatically be entered into the address  
field.  
DHCPv6 Configuration: If you have a  
DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set  
one of the option for default dynamic host  
configuration.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter  
password and press OK.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.  
Routers: Use DHCPv6 only when  
requested by a router.  
DHCPv6 Addresses: Always use  
DHCPv6 regardless of router request.  
DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6  
regardless of router request.  
Security  
This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the  
password.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Description  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK.  
TCP/IP Protocol  
Select appropriate protocol and configure  
parameters to use the network environment.  
Note: There are lots of parameters to be set,  
therefore, if you are not sure, leave as it is, or  
consult the network administrator.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Security.  
Ethernet Speed  
Clear Setting  
802.1x  
You can select the communication speed for  
Ethernet connections.  
Reverts the network settings to the default  
values.  
You can select the user authentication for  
network communication.  
For details information consult the network  
administrator.  
12.7  
<Machine status and advanced set-  
     
Access Control  
Option  
Option  
Description  
Note  
Authentication Foreign Device When you install the optional FDI kit,  
• Using SyncThru™ Web Service, administrators can  
Mode  
Interface  
select On to activate it.  
classify users into several groups according to each user’s  
role. Each user’s authorization, authentication and  
accounting will be controlled by the group’s role definition.  
For example, if a group A only has authorization to use the  
copy function, users in group A can only copy with the  
machine: they cannot fax or scan. You can set this feature  
from SyncThru™ Web Service. Click Security > User  
Access Control > Authority.  
(continue)  
Job Timer: If there is not enough  
credit, you can set the machine to  
cancel a job right away or wait a  
designated amount of time for a  
deposit.  
Print Job Control: When it is  
enabled, the both computer  
printing and copying are possible  
since the credit remains. With  
Disable, copy printing needs the  
credit. However, when printing a  
report or a fax, the credit is not  
needed.  
• When the Single Sign-On (SSO) feature is enabled, users  
just need to log in to the service only one time. Then the  
system automatically checks the user’s authority based on  
the user ID and password. The SSO feature is related to all  
of the security functions such as authentication,  
authorization and accounting. The SSO feature can be  
configured from SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the  
SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See  
page 13.9.) And click Security > User Access Control >  
Authentication> Options.  
Inhibit Services: When no credit is  
left, the machine disables the copy  
job only with Copy Only. With All  
Service, scanning service and  
copy job are disabled.  
Option  
Option  
Description  
Internal Credits: It is used when  
you cancel the job or when the job  
is cancelled by the device due to  
insufficient credits (coin) or is  
canceled by user’s request. If you  
select Enable, the machine  
deposits a credit equal to the  
number of sheets that did not print  
out correctly, then it prints next job  
for free (for the amount deposited).  
With Disable, even if you cancel  
the printing job, the machine  
includes jammed paper in the  
count and the cost of printing shall  
be recovered for the pages already  
billed.  
Authentication No  
It disables Authentication  
Method  
Authentication  
Method.  
Local  
Authentication  
It enables the local authentication  
mode. The user ID and password  
is stored in an internal storage of  
the device. The administrator can  
see the user information from the  
SyncThru™ Web Service >  
Security > User Access Control  
> User Profile menu.  
Network  
It enables the network  
Authentication  
authentication mode. When the  
users already belong to a server-  
based networks, the Network  
Authentication system can be  
simply configured with the  
existing server. Then the user can  
access with the ID and password  
stored in the remote  
Image Counter: Depends on  
whether the machine counts blank  
white pages.  
authentication server.  
To use any features in Network  
Authentication mode, the users  
have to get a certificate from  
SMB, FTP, LDAP, or Keberos  
server defined in SyncThru™  
Web Service.  
12.8  
<Machine status and advanced set-  
     
The authentication service and accounting service can be enabled  
independently. The services refer to the user information differently case  
by case.  
Option  
Option  
Description  
Accounting  
Method  
No Accounting It disables accounting features.  
• Using Local Authentication only,  
You can set the network account  
for users by using SyncThru™  
Web Admin Service’s job  
accounting plug-in. When the  
users performs their copy, fax,  
print, or scan service job with the  
machine, the account module  
records it. You can see the report  
from the SyncThru™ Web  
Admin Service.  
Network  
Accounting  
Using Local Authentication and Standard Accounting,  
Using Local Authentication and Network Accounting: Refers to  
User Profile from Security > User Access Control menu.  
(continue)  
• Using Network Authentication only,  
Using Network Authentication and Standard Accounting,  
Using Network Authentication and Network Accounting: Refers to  
the user information in the network authentication server. Disables the  
user in User Profile to access the device  
Standard Accounting only: Refers to the Standard Account List  
from SyncThru™ Web Service > Security > User Access Control  
> Accounting. (See page 13.9.)  
Standard  
Accounting  
You can set the local account for  
maximum 500 users. When the  
users perform their copy, fax,  
print, or scan service job with the  
machine, the account module  
records it. You can see the report  
from Standard Acct. Usage  
Report in Machine Setup >  
Admin Setting > Print/Report  
tab > Accounting Reports.  
Network Accounting only: Refers to the user information in network  
authentication server.  
Registering local authorized users  
1
2
3
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service for your machine.  
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See  
As the device itself can manage  
user’s ID and usage without any  
remote server, this feature is  
highly suitable for small and  
medium businesses.  
Select Security > User Access Control > Authentication >  
Authentication Method.  
The accounting system  
regards storing a file to a  
single server as a single  
count.  
4
5
6
Select Local Authentication.  
Click on the Apply button.  
Click on Authority, and check a Role Name according to the  
Accounting ID List: It shows  
the accounting ID list. You can  
add, edit, or delete the ID.  
Login Setting: You can  
configure for user to login either  
with ID and password (ID &  
password Login) or with ID  
only (ID only Login).  
Accounting ID List: It shows  
the accounting ID list. You can  
add, edit, or delete the ID.  
Login Setting: You can  
configure for user to login either  
with ID and password (ID &  
password Login) or with ID  
only (ID only Login).  
current user’s role.  
- You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.  
7
Click on User Profile and check the users.  
- You can add users by clicking the Add button.  
- If you want add information to the Address Book, check the  
Automatically add your information to Address Book.  
- Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is  
activated.  
- Select the user’s role from Role item.  
8
Click on Apply.  
Register authorized network users  
1
2
3
4
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
on Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.  
User Authentication Method  
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See  
If you are an administrator, you can enable authentication service before  
using the machine to improve security for the device. If user  
authentication service has been activated, only authorized users can use  
the device. With authentication service, you also can give permission to  
each user and set the maximum number of job executions for a user.  
Select Security > User Access Control > Authentication >  
Authentication Method.  
Select Kerberos, SMB, or LDAP.  
12.9  
<Machine status and advanced set-  
8
9
Users can add a backup domain as in the previous step.  
Note  
Before configuring network authentication, you need to  
configure External Authentication Server from Security >  
Network Security  
Click on Apply.  
Note  
Users can add up to 6 alternate domains.  
5
6
Click on the Apply button.  
Click on Authority, and check the Role Name according to the  
Enabling network authentication by LDAP  
current user’s role.  
1
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See  
- Users can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.  
7
Click on User Profile and check the users.  
2
Select Security > Network Security > External Authentication  
Server > LDAP Server.  
- You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.  
- If you want add the information to Address Book, check the  
Automatically add your information to Address Book option.  
- Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.  
3
4
5
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.  
- Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is  
activated.  
- Select the user’s role from Role.  
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See  
8
Click Apply.  
Click Security > Network Security > External Authentication  
Server > LDAP Server.  
Enabling network authentication by Kerberos  
1
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See  
6
7
8
Select IP Address or Host Name.  
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
2
Select Security > Network Security > External Authentication  
Server > Kerberos Server.  
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 389.  
- Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.  
Enter the realm used for Kerberos login.  
Select the IP Address or Host Name.  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP  
directory tree.  
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 88.  
10 Select Authentication method. There are two options for LDAP  
server login:  
Anonymous: This is used to bind with null password and login ID  
(Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).  
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.  
You can add a backup domain as a previous step.  
Click on Apply.  
11 Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN.  
12 Select Match User°Øs Login ID to the following LDAP attribute  
Enabling network authentication by SMB  
(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).  
1
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See  
13 Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search  
results, and search timeout.  
2
Select Security > External Authentication Server > SMB Server.  
Note  
- Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.  
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search the referral server if the  
LDAP server has no data to reply to the query and if the LDAP  
server has a referral server.  
3
4
5
6
7
Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.  
Select IP Address or Host Name.  
14 Select Search Name Order.  
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
The default port number is 139.  
15 Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.  
12.10  
<Machine status and advanced  
Note  
Log  
This option is only provided if you have selected the Network  
authentication option in the user authentication setting. You  
may check this option if you want to search for information in a  
default email address group.  
Description  
Job Log  
You can enable (or disable) job log to record job  
processing results. You can print the records in  
Machine Setup > Admin Setting > Print/Report  
tab > Job Log Report.  
16 Click on Apply.  
Operation Log You can enable (or disable) operation log to record  
various operations such as formatting the system,  
creating document box, deleting file, etc. You can  
print the records in Machine Setup > Admin  
Setting > Print/Report tab > Operation Log  
Report.  
User Accounting Method  
Enabling Acccounting Method  
1
2
3
4
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.  
Security Event You can enable or disable security event log to  
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See  
Log  
record history such as user authentication, software  
upgrading, access log, exporting or importing data,  
etc. You can print the records in Machine Setup >  
Admin Setting > Print/Report tab > Security  
Event Log Report.  
Select Security > User Access Control > Accounting >  
Accounting Method.  
Select Standard Accounting.  
Note  
Change Admin. Password  
If you want to allow users to login only with ID, then check  
Authenticate with Login ID only.  
You can change the password for the Admin Setting authentication.  
Information Hiding  
5
Click on the Apply button.  
Option  
Option  
Description  
Standard acccounting List  
Hiding  
Level  
Setting  
Show All  
Information  
All information in Job Status is  
displayed to all users.  
1
2
3
4
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click  
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.  
Show Non-  
Secure  
Information  
Only  
Non-secured information in Job  
Status is displayed to all users. The  
secured information, such as secured  
received fax list or secured print list,  
will be displayed only to the owner.  
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See  
Select Security > User Access Control > Accounting > Standard  
Accounting List.  
Show Own  
Information  
Only  
All information in Job Status is  
displayed to the owner.  
Select Standard Accounting.  
Note  
Hiding  
Method  
Setting  
Char Counts  
Of Information name in Job Status, you can see a  
Instead of the job name and owner's  
You can add users to the accounting list by clicking on the Add  
button. Enter a user’s ID, password and assign job limitation to  
the user.  
sequence of asterisks (*) characters.  
Fixed Counts The job name and owner’s name in  
Except First  
Char  
Job Status display as many as  
entered number of asterisks (*)  
except the first character.  
5
Click on the Apply button.  
Fixed Counts The job name and owner’s name in  
Job Status display as many as  
entered number of asterisks (*).  
12.11  
<Machine status and advanced  
     
Optional Service  
Adjusting the color contrast  
When you want to add the optional features for this machine, you have to  
install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate  
those features. Follow the next steps to enable those features.  
This menu allows you to adjust the color setting.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
password and press OK.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
3
Press the Setup tab > Color.  
password and press OK.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Optional Service.  
Option  
Description  
Toner Density This item allows you to calibrate toner density for the  
Calibration best possible color print quality.  
Copy  
Description  
Custom Color This item allows you to adjust contrast, color by  
Enables or disables the Copy menu from the  
color.  
main screen.  
CMYK: Allows you to adjust the contrast of the toner  
in each toner cartridge.  
Analog Fax  
Scan to Email  
Scan to PC  
After installing the fax kit, select this option  
Enable to use this machine as a fax machine.  
Default: Optimizes colors automatically.  
Manual Adjust: Allows you to manually  
adjust the color contrast for each cartridge.  
Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu  
from the scan screen.  
Note: You should use the Default setting for best  
color quality.  
Set Enable to activate the scanning and  
sending it via network.  
Scan to SMB  
Scan to FTP  
Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option  
from the scan screen.  
Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option  
from the scan screen.  
Manual Image  
Overwrite  
You can set the machine to delete previous job  
information on HDD as you store new job  
information. Set this option to Enable, go to the  
General tab > Manual Image Overwrite, press  
Start in the display to start the overwriting job.  
Automatic Image If you select Enable, the machine renews the  
Overwrite HDD memory when you save new job on it.  
12.12  
<Machine status and advanced  
         
Option  
Description  
Option  
Description  
Auto Color  
Registration  
The machine virtually prints certain patterned image  
to calibrate the color printing position. This feature  
enhances the colored image sharper and clearer,  
which means the machine prints the colored image  
on the paper more like the one in the monitor. Select  
On to activate this feature. You can set the  
Auto Color  
Tone  
Adjustment  
This item allows you to automatically adjust color  
tone for the best possible color print quality.  
Color Tone Adjustment Activation: Activates  
color tone adjustment. Press On to activate this  
feature. If this option is On, the machine will  
regularly and automatically adjust color tone.  
Setting Color Standard: Sets the standard for  
adjusting color tone. You need to set this option at  
least once when you purchase the machine. This  
option will reduce the color difference between  
machines by setting a color standard. (Page 3.2)  
Color Tone Adjustment: Adjusts the color tone.  
This option uses the color standard you set in  
Setting Color Standard and applies to the  
machine.  
Note: You need to set Setting Color Standard  
option before using Color Tone Adjustment  
option.  
Calibrating ID Sensor: Automatically calculates  
the reduced or worn out supplies like toner or  
machine parts and uses this information to adjust  
the color tone. For example, if the yellow toner is  
running out, the machine calculates the amount of  
remaining yellow toner and adjusts color tone so  
the printouts are fine.  
frequency of performing the function by pages,  
temperature of a machine or LSU.  
Page Condition: The machine performs this  
feature after certain number of page has been  
printed out.  
Inner Temperature Condition: The machine  
performs this feature if the machine temperature is  
different from the last this feature done. If you set  
this option to 3, the machine detects the inner  
temperature, and when the temperature difference  
is over or below three degree, the machine will  
perform this feature. You can set the temperature  
difference by clicking arrows.  
LSU Temperature Condition: The machine  
performs this feature if the temperature of  
LSU(Laser Scanning Unit) is different from the last  
this feature done. If you set this option to 3, the  
machine detects the temperature of LSU, and  
when the temperature difference is over or below  
three degree, the machine will perform this  
feature. You can set the temperature difference by  
clicking arrows.  
Manual Color This item allows you to quickly adjust color tone. You  
Tone  
Adjustment  
can easily adjust the color tone and see the result  
right away but it’s not a permenant adjustment. Use  
this item to get a quick result.  
Execute Now: The printer executes the auto color  
registration now.  
Note  
If Color Tone Adjustment Activation is set to Off, you need to  
use Manual Color Tone Adjustment everytime you need to  
adjust the color tone.  
12.13  
<Machine status and advanced  
Document Box Management  
Standard Workflow Management  
You can set a person performing deletion of the public boxes in Public  
.
You can set whether to use or not to use each features that standard  
workflow provides.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Document Box Management.  
3
Press the Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management.  
Auto  
Description  
Description  
To create and execute a workform including the auto  
redirection feature, enable this option.  
Redirection  
Public Box  
Deletion  
If you set this option to Administrators only, only  
the administrator can delete the publicly stored  
boxes in Public, because the machine will asks  
the password of administrator.  
Approve  
To create and execute a workform including the  
approval feature, enable this option.  
Complete  
Report  
To add a completion report in your workform, enable  
this option.  
Complete  
Notification  
To add a completion notification in your workform,  
enable this option.  
Default Fax  
To create and execute a workform including the fax  
feature, enable this option.  
12.14  
<Machine status and advanced  
     
Option  
Description  
Printing a report  
Report  
Configuration You can print a report on the  
You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etcetera.  
Report  
machine's overall configuration.  
Fax Report  
You can set to print the information of  
a fax reports.  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK.  
Multi Send Report: When you fax  
to several destination, set this  
option to print a transmission report.  
On is to print every time you send a  
fax, the machine prints a  
3
Press the Print/Report tab.  
confirmation report. With On-Error,  
only when the transmission error  
occurred, the report will be printed  
out.  
Fax Send Report Appearance:  
You can select whether the image  
on the confirmation report shows or  
not.  
Fax Sent/Received Report: The  
machine stores the logs on each  
transmission and prints out every  
50 logs with this option On. It you  
select Off, the machine stores the  
logs but does not print.  
Fax Send Report: The machine  
prints the confirmation report after  
each fax job, only when you send a  
fax to one destination.  
Description  
Print  
You can print Network  
Configuration, PS3 Font List, PCL  
Font List and Schedule Jobs  
Report. Schedule Jobs Report  
shows the job list in pending, in  
waiting, in delayed faxing or the  
Mailbox list as well.  
Report  
E-mail  
The report shows the job of scanning  
Confirmation and sending it via Scan to Email.  
Accounting Supplies  
Reports Information  
You can print the amount of each  
category that your machine has  
printed so far.  
(Continue)  
Report  
On: The report is printed whether a  
job successfully completed or  
failed.  
Off: No report is printed after  
completing a job.  
On-Error: Only in case of error  
occurrence, the machine prints the  
report.  
Network Auth. It displays user login IDs and emails.  
Log Report  
Usage Page  
Report  
You can print the report on the  
amount of printouts depending on the  
paper size and type.  
Accounting  
Reports  
Prints the report of printing out count  
for each login user. This is used only  
when network authentication in  
enabled with SyncThru™ Web  
Service. (Page 13.9)  
Scan to Server The report shows the job of scanning  
Confirmation and sending it via SMB and FTP.  
On: The report is printed whether a  
job successfully completed or  
failed.  
StandardAcct. Prints the used amount of Standard  
Usage Report Accounting  
Off: No report is printed after  
completing a job.  
StandardAcct. Prints the remained amount of  
On-Error: Only in case of error  
occurrence, the machine prints the  
report.  
Remain  
Report  
Standard Accounting  
Clean Fuser  
You can clean the inside of a fuser  
roller by printing a cleaning paper.  
You can select among On, Off, Print  
Now. Default setting is On.  
12.15  
<Machine status and advanced  
                             
Note  
You can also print machine's status information and browse  
status with SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the web browser  
on your networked computer and type the IP address of your  
machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click  
Information > Print information.  
12.16  
<Machine status and advanced  
You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is  
almost over and needs to be reordered.  
13Maintenance  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine.  
This chapter includes:  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK  
.
3
4
5
Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Imaging Unit  
Reorder Notification.  
Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option on, and press  
Imaging Unit Low Alert Level to set the remained life level.  
Press OK  
.
Printing a machine report  
Monitoring the supplies life  
If you want to view the supply life indicators, follow the next step.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Machine Status  
.
Scroll down to browse the entire supplies with list view the  
percentage remaining.  
Finding the serial number  
If you want to check your serial number from the screen, follow the next  
steps.  
1
2
PressMachine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Machine Details  
.
Sending the imaging unit reorder notification  
13.1  
<Maintenance>  
                   
Search: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.  
Sending the toner reorder notification  
Enter: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.  
You can set the machine to alert you that the toner cartridge needs to be  
reordered.  
Cleaning your machine  
1
2
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below  
each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality  
problems occur.  
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter  
password and press OK  
.
3
4
5
Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge  
Reorder Notification.  
Caution  
• Cleaning the machine cabinet with cleaning materials that  
contain large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong  
substances can discolor or damage the cabinet.  
Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option on, and press Toner  
Low Alert Level to set the remained life level.  
• If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner,  
we recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with  
water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in  
the air and might be harmful to you.  
Press OK  
.
Checking Document Box  
Cleaning the outside  
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen the  
cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into  
the machine.  
The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job.  
Press Document Box on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other  
menu, press (  
) to go to the Main screen.  
Cleaning the inside  
Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine.  
Cleaning the scan unit  
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We  
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during  
the day, as needed.  
1
2
3
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
Open the scanner lid.  
Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is  
clean and dry.  
User Box tab: Create the box where you can save the document  
such as the file you have printed, sent by email or scanned. When  
you create a box, you can set the password to secure your box.  
The box with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it  
is called public box.  
System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you  
cannot modify them.  
Type: Shows the box is secured or not.  
Box Name: Shows the box name.  
1
2
3
4
Scanner lid  
Scanner glass  
White sheet  
DADF glass  
Owner: Shows the user name of a box.  
Date: Shows the date of a box created.  
File: Shows the number of total files in the box.  
Add: Lets you add more boxes.  
4
5
Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is  
clean and dry.  
Delete: Deletes the selected box.  
Edit: Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name.  
Detail: Shows box information.  
Close the scanner lid.  
13.2  
<Maintenance>  
                         
operating environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size.  
For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is  
high and you may need to change the cartridge more often.  
Maintaining the toner cartridge  
Toner cartridge storage  
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light,  
temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the  
recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality,  
and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.  
Redistributing toner  
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life.  
• White streaks or light printing occurs.  
Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used  
in; this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions.  
The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until  
installation If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of  
the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.  
• The message saying that the estimated toner cartridge life is closed  
may appear on the display.  
If this happens, you can temporarily reestablish print quality by  
redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white  
streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the  
toner.  
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its  
useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner  
cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:  
1
Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to  
cool.  
• Inside the protective bag from the original package.  
• Correct side up in a horizontal position (not standing on end).  
2
Open the side cover.  
• Do not store consumables in;  
- Temperature greater than 40C (104F).  
- Humidity range less than 20% nor greater than 80%.  
- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.  
- Direct sunlight or room light.  
- Dusty places.  
- A car for a long period of time.  
- An environment where corrosive gases are present.  
- An environment with salty air.  
Handling instructions  
• Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.  
• Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.  
• Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction;  
this can cause internal damage and toner spillage.  
3
Open the front cover.  
Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge  
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-  
Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store  
brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.  
Note  
Samsungs printer warranty does not cover damage to the  
machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or  
non-Samsung brand toner cartridge.  
Expected cartridge life  
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on  
the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number  
may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on,  
13.3  
<Maintenance>  
                 
8
Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the  
machine on.  
Note  
Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it  
does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service  
representative when print quality problems occur.  
Caution  
If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not  
operate.  
4
Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine.  
Replacing the toner cartridge  
The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each  
one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).  
• The status LED and the toner-related message on the display  
indicates which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced.  
• The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memory.  
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of  
the toner cartridge for your machine. (Page 15.1)  
1
Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to  
cool.  
2
Open the side cover.  
5
Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the  
toner evenly inside the cartridge.  
Note  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and  
wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
6
Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot  
inside the machine. Insert it back into its slot until it locks in place.  
Note  
Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it  
does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service  
representative when print quality problems occur.  
7
Close the front cover, then the side cover.  
13.4  
<Maintenance>  
   
3
Open the front cover.  
7
Hold the new toner cartridge by the handle and slide the new toner  
cartridge in until it locks in place.  
4
Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine.  
8
9
Close the front cover, then the side cover.  
Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the  
machine on.  
Caution  
If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not  
operate.  
5
6
Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.  
Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the  
toner evenly inside the cartridge.  
Note  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and  
wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
13.5  
<Maintenance>  
4
Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle.  
Replacing the imaging unit  
Expected cartridge life  
The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 30,000 pages. The  
screen displays Replace [xxx] Imaging Unit when the imaging unit is  
near the end of life. Otherwise your printer stops printing.  
Imaging unit yield may be affected by the operating environment,  
optional, printing interval, media type and media size.  
For ordering information for imaging unit. (Page 15.1)  
1
Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to  
cool.  
2
Open the side cover.  
5
Turn the imaging unit locking levers outwards to release and open  
the inner cover.  
3
Open the front cover.  
6
Pull the used imaging unit out of the machine using the handle on its  
bottom.  
13.6  
<Maintenance>  
     
7
Remove the new imaging unit from its bag.  
11 Labels inside the machine identify each imaging unit’s position.  
Holding the handles on the new imaging unit, push the imaging unit  
until it locks in place.  
Caution  
Don’t use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to  
open the imaging unit package. You could damage the  
surface of the imaging unit.  
8
9
Remove the paper protecting the surface of the imaging unit.  
Remove the cap, and carefully pull the seal tapes out of the imaging  
unit.  
10 Thoroughly shake the new imaging unit side to side five or six times.  
12 Turn the imaging unit locking levers inwards until it locks in place  
and close the inner cover.  
Note  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and  
wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
Caution  
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit.  
To prevent damage, do not expose the imaging unit to  
light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of  
paper to protect it if necessary.  
13 Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to  
make sure that it is firmly seated in place.  
14 Close the front cover, then the side cover.  
15 Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the  
machine on.  
Caution  
If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not  
operate.  
13.7  
<Maintenance>  
4
Push the lock lever up and pull the waste toner container out.  
Replacing the waste toner container  
The life of the waste toner container unit is approximately 48,000 images  
printing. When the life span of the waste toner container has expired,  
Waste tank is full. Replace it appears on the screen display of the  
control panel, indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced.  
Otherwise your printer stops printing.  
To replace the waste toner container:  
1
Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to  
cool.  
2
Open the side cover.  
Note  
When you pull out the waste toner container out of the  
machine, move the container carefully not to drop it from  
your hands.  
Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat  
surface so that the toner does not spill.  
5
Remove the container’s cap from the container as shown below,  
and use it to close the waste toner container openings.  
3
Open the front cover.  
Caution  
Do not tilt or turn over the container.  
6
7
Take a new waste toner container out of its package.  
Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure  
that it is firmly seated in place.  
8
9
Close the front cover, then the side cover.  
Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the  
machine on.  
Caution  
If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not  
operate.  
13.8  
<Maintenance>  
   
Maintenance Parts  
Managing your machine from the website  
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts  
and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items  
will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the  
life span of each item has expired.  
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP  
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via  
Samsung’s SyncThru™ Web Service, an embedded web server. Use  
SyncThru™ Web Service to:  
• View the device information and check its current status.  
• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.  
• Change the printer properties.  
Items  
Part Name  
Yield (Average)  
Approx.  
100,000 images  
Transfer belt unit  
Cartridge-transfer  
• Set the machine to send email notifications and update you on the  
machine’s status.  
Transfer roller  
(T2)  
MEA unit-TR(2)  
ELA unit fuser  
Approx. 100,000  
pages  
• Get support for using the machine.  
Fuser unit  
Approx. 100,000  
pages  
To access SyncThru™ Web Service:  
DADF rubber pad  
DADF feed roller  
RMO-ADF rubber  
MEA-ADF roller  
Approx. 50,000  
pages  
1
2
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address  
Approx. 200,000  
pages  
field and press the Enter key or click Go  
.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
Multi-purposetray MEA unit-holder pad  
rubber pad  
Approx. 50,000  
pages  
Note  
SyncThru™ Web Service allows administrator to set up the  
machine. If you want to access Settings or Security menu,  
login first. Press Login button, and enter user ID and password  
from the pop-up window. Then press LOGIN button.  
The initial administrator’s setting is as follows:  
Guide exit duplex  
Paper feed roller  
MP Pickup roller  
Side cover grill  
MEA unit_exit duplex  
MEA unit-roller PU  
ELA HOU-MP pickup  
DUPLEX-cover filter  
Approx. 100,000  
pages  
Approx. 100,000  
pages  
• The default ID: admin  
• The default password: sec00000  
Approx. 200,000  
pages  
Approx. 100,000  
pages  
We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an  
authorized service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the  
machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of the  
maintenance parts after their lifespan.  
13.9  
<Maintenance>  
             
Clearing document jams  
14Troubleshooting  
When an original jams while passing through the DADF, the warming  
message appears on the display screen.  
This chapter gives helpful information on what to do if you encounter a  
problem.  
Caution  
This chapter includes:  
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document  
gently and slowly.  
Note  
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin,  
or mixed paper-type originals.  
1
2
Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.  
Open the DADF cover.  
Tips for avoiding paper jams  
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.  
When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 14.3.  
• Follow the procedure on page 4.7. Ensure that the adjustable guides  
are positioned correctly.  
• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the  
paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.  
• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.  
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.  
• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
• Do not mix paper types in a tray.  
• Use only recommended print media. (Page 4.9  
)
• Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in  
the tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.  
3
Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.  
• If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper:  
Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the  
tray. If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex)  
is not supported.  
Note  
If you see no paper in this area, refer to Roller misfeed.  
(Page 14.2)  
4
Close the DADF cover. Then reload the pages you removed, if any,  
in the DADF.  
14.1  
<Troubleshooting>  
             
Misfeed of exiting paper  
Roller misfeed  
1
2
Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.  
Open the DADF cover.  
1
2
Open the scanner lid.  
Grasp the misfed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area  
by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.  
1
3
Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document  
gently out of the DADF.  
scanner lid  
1
if you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.  
Open the white document background.  
3
4
Close the DADF cover and the document input tray. Then place the  
documents back in the DADF.  
14.2  
<Troubleshooting>  
     
4
Remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling.  
Clearing paper jams  
When a paper jam occurs, the warming message appears on the display  
screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.  
Message  
Location of jam  
Go to  
Paper Jam in tray 1  
Paper Jam in tray2  
In the paper feed area Page 14.3  
(tray 1, optional tray,  
or multi-purpose tray)  
Page 14.6  
Page 14.5  
Paper Jam in tray 2(HCF)  
Paper Jam in tray3  
Page 14.7  
Paper Jam in MP tray  
Paper Jam in exit area  
In the fuser area  
Paper Jam inside of machine In the paper inside the Page 14.7  
machine  
Paper Jam at the bottom of In the duplex unit  
Page 14.8  
duplex path  
5
Close the white document background and the scanner lid. Then  
load the removed pages back into the DADF.  
Paper Jam at the top of  
duplex path  
Paper Jam inside of duplex  
path  
Paper jam in front of finisher Paper jammed in the Page 14.9  
stacker.  
Paper jam inside finisher  
Paper jam inside finisher?  
duplex  
Paper jammed in the Page 14.9  
stacker.  
Paper jam at exit of finisher  
Paper jammed in the Page 14.10  
stacker exit part.  
Caution  
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently  
and slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to  
clear the jam.  
In the tray 1  
1
Open the side cover.  
14.3  
<Troubleshooting>  
         
2
Open the guide in the direction shown.  
5
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.  
Once you remove the jammed paper here, open the side cover and  
then close it to clear the error message on the display.  
3
Carefully remove the misfed paper in the direction shown.  
6
Close the side cover and insert the paper tray. Lower the rear part of  
the Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the  
machine, then insert it completely.  
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any  
paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.  
4
Lift the front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the  
machine.  
14.4  
<Troubleshooting>  
4
Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the  
machine.  
In the optional tray  
Note  
This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in  
the optional tray 2. Please refer to the next method for other  
optional trays, since the method is same as the tray 2  
1
Open the outer cover in tray 2.  
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the  
paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.  
5
Remove the paper in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the  
paper, pull it out gently and slowly.  
2
Open the inner cover of tray 2.  
3
Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing  
the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.  
6
Insert the paper tray and close the two covers.  
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any  
paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.  
14.5  
<Troubleshooting>  
   
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any  
paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.  
In the optional high capacity feeder  
1
Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder.  
4
5
Pull out the optional high capacity feeder.  
Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the  
machine.  
2
Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder.  
6
Remove the paper in the direction shown. Pull it out gently and  
slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.  
3
Pull the jammed paper out, in the direction shown, pulling gently and  
slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.  
If the jammed paper is not visible, or if the paper is stuck, stop  
pulling and continue on to step 5.  
14.6  
<Troubleshooting>  
   
7
Insert the paper tray and close the two covers.  
In the paper inside the machine  
Note  
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the  
machine.  
1
Open the side cover.  
In the multi-purpose tray  
1
If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the  
machine.  
2
Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.  
2
Open and close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.  
If you do not see any paper in this area, go to step 3.  
14.7  
<Troubleshooting>  
       
3
Open the guide in the direction shown and pull the jammed paper  
gently out of the machine.  
3
Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.  
4
Open and close the front cover to resume printing.  
In the duplex unit area  
In the fuser area  
If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, paper jam may occur. Make  
sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.  
1
2
Open the side cover.  
1
2
Open the side cover.  
Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.  
Remove the jammed paper.  
If the jammed paper is inside the fuser, remove the jammed paper in the  
direction show.  
3
Close the side cover.  
14.8  
<Troubleshooting>  
       
5
Close the stacker front cover.  
In the stacker (finisher)  
Paper jam inside finisher, Paper jam inside finisher? duplex  
Paper jam in front of finisher  
1
Open the stacker front cover.  
1
Open the stacker front cover.  
2
Pull the stacker lever 1a down. If necessary, pull the stacker lever  
1b down as well.  
2
Press right of 1c lever and then push stacker to left.  
3
Remove the jammed paper.  
3
4
Remove the jammed paper.  
Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound ‘click’.  
14.9  
<Troubleshooting>  
       
4
Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover.  
Understanding display messages  
Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control  
panel display to indicate machine status or errors. Refer to the tables  
below to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem, if  
necessary. Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical  
order.  
Note  
• If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try  
the printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.  
•When you call for service, it is very convenient to provide the  
service representative with the contents of display message.  
• Some messages may not appear in the display depending on  
options or models.  
• [xxx] indicates the part of the each toner cartridge or each  
imaging unit.  
• [yyy] indicates the part of the machine.  
• [zzz] indicates the error code. When you contact the service  
center, this error code help to handle the problem.  
Paper jam at exit of finisher  
1
Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.  
• You may see an exclamation mark (  
) or a cross mark  
(
) on the upper left of the display, in that case, press the  
question mark to browse detailed information on the supplies.  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
[yyy] is worn.  
Replace with new  
one  
The life of the part  
expires totally.  
Replace the part with  
a new one. Call for  
service.  
[xxx] imaging unit  
is not compatible.  
Check userís  
guide  
The imaging unit you  
have installed is not  
for your machine.  
Install a Samsung-  
genuine imaging unit,  
designed for your  
machine.  
[xxx] imaging unit  
is not installed.  
Install it  
The imaging unit is not Install the imaging  
installed, or the CRUM unit. If it is already  
2
Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.  
(Consumer  
installed, try to  
reinstall the imaging  
unit.  
Replaceable Unit  
Monitor) in the  
cartridge is not  
connected.  
If the problem  
persists, please call  
for service.  
Replace with new  
The imaging unit is at  
Replace a imaging  
[xxx] imaging unit the end of its life.  
unit with a Samsung-  
When the imaging unit genuine imaging unit.  
replacement message (Page 13.6)  
appears on the screen  
and if you select  
Continue, this  
message displays.  
14.10  
<Troubleshooting>  
         
Message  
[xxx] toner  
cartridge is not  
compatible. Check not for your machine.  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Finisher door is  
open. Close it  
The finisher cover is  
not securely latched.  
Close the finisher  
until it locks into  
place.  
The toner cartridge  
you have installed is  
Install a Samsung-  
genuine toner  
cartridge, designed  
for your machine.  
userís guide  
Finisher error:  
[zzz]. Please turn  
off then on  
Turn the machine off  
and reinstall the  
finisher again. Check  
that the finisher cable  
is connected  
properly. If the  
problem persists,  
please call for  
There is a problem in  
the finisher unit.  
[xxx] toner  
cartridge is not  
installed. Install it  
The toner cartridge is  
not installed or the  
CRUM (Consumer  
Replaceable Unit  
Monitor) in the  
Try to reinstall the  
toner cartridge.  
cartridge is not  
properly connected.  
service.  
DC motor does not  
operate: [zzz].  
Please turn off  
then on  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
There is a problem in  
the control of DC  
motor unit.  
Fuser error: [zzz].  
Please turn off  
then on  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
There is a problem in  
the fuser unit working.  
service.  
service.  
Did not supply  
enough [xxx]  
toner. Remove  
seal tape &  
Not supplied toner to  
the imaging unit.  
• Remove the  
sealing tape from  
the imaging unit.  
• Thoroughly roll the  
toner cartridge five  
or six times, and  
reinstall it.  
• Turn the machine  
off and turn it on  
again.  
Fuser unit is not  
installed correctly.  
Install it  
The fuser unit is not  
installed or correctly.  
Install the fuser unit.  
Call for service.  
reinstall  
LSU error: [zzz].  
Please turn off  
then on  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
There is a problem in  
the control of LSU unit.  
service.  
Motor does not  
operate: [zzz].  
Please turn off  
then on  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
There is a problem in  
the control of motor  
unit.  
Did not supply  
enough [xxx]  
toner. Please  
open/close door  
The machine received Check the toner  
several papers with  
many images, and it  
cannot supply the  
toner properly.  
cartridge and  
redistribute the toner.  
(Page 13.3) If the  
problem still persists,  
please call for  
service.  
Original paper  
does not feed in  
scanner  
The lead edge of the  
document failed to  
actuate the scan  
sensor within the  
correct time after  
actuating the  
Open the DADF  
cover and remove  
jammed original.  
(Page 14.1)  
service.  
End of life,  
Replace with new  
[xxx] imaging unit  
The imaging unit has  
reached its life span.  
Replace the imaging  
unit.  
registration sensor.  
A toner cartridge has  
reached its estimated  
cartridge life. The  
End of life,  
Replace with new  
[xxx] toner  
Replace the toner  
cartridge with a  
Samsung-genuine  
toner cartridge.  
(Page 13.4)  
Original paper is  
too long for  
scanner. Check  
size  
Oversized document  
or double-feeding of  
originals.  
Open the DADF  
cover and remove the  
jammed original.  
(Page 14.1)  
printer stops printing.  
cartridge  
Check the document  
size whether it is  
supported.  
Fax memory is  
almost full. Print  
or remove  
There is no more  
available fax memory. fax data in the  
No more fax data can  
be received.  
Delete the received  
(Page 17.1)  
memory. Call for  
service to delete fax  
memory.  
received fax Job  
Original paper jam  
in front of scanner  
The originals are  
jammed in DADF.  
Open the DADF  
cover and remove the  
jammed original.  
(Page 14.1)  
Fax memory is full.  
Print or remove  
received fax Job  
Available fax memory  
is now 1MB.  
Delete the received  
fax data in the  
memory to secure  
memory. Call for  
service.  
14.11  
<Troubleshooting>  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Original paper jam  
in front of scanner  
duplex path  
Paper jam inside  
finisher  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex printing  
in the DADF.  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 14.2)  
Paper jammed in the  
stacker.  
Open the stacker  
door and remove  
jammed paper by  
lowering guide 1a or  
1b.  
Original paper jam  
inside of scanner  
The lead edge of the  
document failed to  
actuate the gate  
sensor within the  
correct time after  
actuating the scan  
sensor.  
Open the DADF  
cover and remove the  
jammed original.  
(Page 14.1)  
Paper jam inside  
finisher? duplex  
Paper jammed in the  
stacker.  
Open the stacker  
door and remove  
jammed paper by  
lowering guide 1a or  
1b.  
When the machine is  
on, jammed paper is  
detected in the DADF.  
Paper Jam inside  
of duplex path  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex printing. (Page 14.8)  
Clear the jam.  
Paper Jam inside  
of machine  
Paper has jammed in  
the registration area.  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 14.7)  
Original paper jam  
while reversing  
paper in scanner  
The lead edge of the  
document failed to  
actuate the duplex  
sensor within the  
correct time when the  
document was fed the  
wrong way.  
Lift up the document  
input traz and remove  
the jammed original.  
(Page 14.1)  
Small amount of toner  
is left in the cartridge.  
the estimated cartridge  
life of toner is close.  
Prepare new [xxx]  
toner cartridge  
Prepare a new  
cartridge for a  
replacement. You  
may temporarily  
increase the printing  
quality by  
Paper jam at exit  
of finisher  
Paper jammed in the  
stacker exit part.  
Pull jammed paper  
from the stacker exit.  
redistributing the  
toner. (Page 13.3)  
Paper Jam at the  
bottom of duplex  
path  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex printing. (Page 14.8)  
Clear the jam.  
Paper Jam at the  
top of duplex path  
Paper has jammed  
during duplex printing. (Page 14.8)  
Clear the jam.  
Paper Jam in exit  
area  
Paper has jammed in  
the fuser area.  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 14.8)  
Paper jam in front  
of finisher  
Paper jammed in the  
stacker.  
Open the stacker  
door and remove  
jammed paper by  
lowering guide 1a or  
1b.  
Paper Jam in MP  
tray  
Paper misfed from  
multi-purpose tray  
Clear the jam.  
(Page 14.7)  
Paper Jam in tray 1 Paper has jammed in  
Clear the jam.  
the feeding area of the (Page 14.3 and  
tray.  
page 14.5)  
Paper Jam in tray 2 Paper has jammed in  
Clear the jam.  
the feeding area of the (Page 14.3 and  
tray.  
page 14.5)  
Paper Jam in tray  
2(HCF)  
Paper has jammed in  
the feeding area of the (Page 14.3 and  
Clear the jam.  
tray.  
page 14.5)  
Paper Jam in tray 3  
Paper has jammed in  
Clear the jam.  
the feeding area of the (Page 14.3 and  
tray. page 14.5)  
14.12  
<Troubleshooting>  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
You can choose among  
Stop, Continue or  
Mono Only as shown  
on the control panel. If  
you select Stop, the  
printer stops printing  
and you cannot print  
any more without  
changing the cartridge.  
If you select Continue,  
the printer keeps  
printing but the printing  
quality cannot be  
Staple cartridge is  
not installed.  
Install it in finisher  
Replace with new  
[xxx] toner  
cartridge  
A toner cartridge has  
almost reached its  
estimated cartridge  
life.  
The staple cartridge is Install the staple  
not installed.  
cartridge following  
the steps explained  
on the back of the  
finisher door.  
Note  
(Page 16.2) If you  
want to continue the  
print job and  
disregard of this error  
message, go to  
Admin Setting to  
adjust the option.  
(Page 12.2)  
• If the black toner  
cartridge is reached  
its estimated  
cartridge life, Mono  
Only message does  
not appear.  
• Samsung does not  
recommend using  
non-genuine  
Samsung toner  
cartridge such as  
refilled or  
guaranteed. If you  
System error:  
[zzz]. Please turn  
off then on  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
There is a problem in  
the system operation.  
select Mono Only, the  
machine prints the data  
in black only.  
Replace the toner  
service.  
cartridge for the best  
print quality when this  
message appears.  
Using a cartridge  
beyond this stage can  
result in printing quality  
issues. (Page 13.4)  
remanufactured.  
Samsung cannot  
guarantee non-  
genuine Samsung  
toner cartridge's  
quality. Service or  
repair required as a  
result of using non-  
genuine Samsung  
toner cartridges will  
not be covered  
This IP address  
conflicts with an IP  
address already in  
use. Check it  
The IP address is  
used in other place  
elsewhere.  
Check the IP address  
or obtain a new IP  
address.  
Too much paper in  
finisher stacker.  
Remove printed  
paper  
The stacker is full of  
printouts.  
Remove printouts  
from the stacker.  
Too much paper in  
output bin tray.  
Remove printed  
paper  
The printed papers are Remove printed outs  
full on the output tray. from the output tray.  
under the machine  
warranty.  
Scanner locking  
switch is locked or  
another problem  
occurred  
The CCD (Charged  
Couple Device) lock  
has been locked. The  
CCD does not detect  
its home location or  
move.  
Unlock the CCD lock.  
(Page 1.3) Or turn off  
the machine and on  
again. Try again. If  
the problem persists,  
call for service.  
Transfer belt is not  
valid for this  
machine. Check  
user’s guide  
The transfer belt of the Install the a  
machine is not for your Samsung-genuine  
machine.  
part designed for your  
machine.  
The life of the transfer Replace the part with  
Prepare new  
transfer belt unit  
belt expires totally.  
a new one. Call for  
service.  
Sensor failure:  
[zzz]. Call for  
service  
Turn the machine off  
and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for  
There is a problem in  
the sensor signal.  
Waste tank is full.  
Replace it  
The life span of the  
waste toner container  
has expired and the  
printer will stop  
Replace a waste  
toner container with a  
Samsung-genuine  
waste toner  
service.  
printing until a new  
waste toner container  
is placed into the  
printer.  
container.  
(Page 13.8)  
Shake [xxx] toner  
cartridge  
The toner supply is not Thoroughly roll the  
enough.  
new cartridge five or  
six times to distribute  
the toner evenly  
inside the cartridge.  
(Page 13.3)  
USE AUXILIARY  
ACCESS  
The credit is not  
enough to access the  
job according to  
Foreign Device.  
Insert credit into the  
Foreign Device.  
Staple cartridge is  
empty. Replace it  
Stapler is run out.  
Order Staple  
Cartridge.  
(Page 15.2) And  
replace it.  
(Page 16.2)  
14.13  
<Troubleshooting>  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Solving other problems  
The paper keeps  
jamming.  
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing  
on special materials, use the multi-purpose  
tray.  
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the  
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the  
problem is corrected. If the problem persists, please call for service.  
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use  
only paper that meets the specifications  
required by the machine. (Page 4.3)  
• There may be debris inside the machine.  
Open the front cover and remove the debris.  
• If an original does not feed into the machine,  
the DADF rubber pad may need to be  
replaced. Contact a service representative.  
Touch screen problem  
Suggested solutions  
The touch screen • Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.  
does not show  
anything.  
• Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If  
the problem persists, please call for service.  
Transparencies  
stick together in  
the paper exit.  
Use only transparencies specifically designed  
for laser printers. Remove each transparency as  
it exits from the machine.  
Paper feeding problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Envelopes skew  
or fail to feed  
correctly.  
Ensure that the paper guides are against both  
sides of the envelopes.  
Paper is jammed  
during printing.  
Clear the paper jam. (Page 14.3)  
Paper sticks  
together.  
• Ensure that there is not too much paper in the  
tray. The tray can hold up to 520 sheets of  
paper, depending on the thickness of the  
paper.  
• Make sure that you are using the correct type  
of paper. (Page 4.3)  
• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan  
the paper.  
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to  
stick together.  
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The  
The machine is not  
receiving power.  
Check the power cord  
connections. Check the  
power switch and the power  
source.  
machine  
does not  
print.  
The machine is not  
selected as the  
default printer.  
Select Samsung CLX-8540  
Series PCL 6 or Samsung  
CLX-8540 Series PS as your  
default printer in your  
Windows.  
Multiple sheets of • Different types of paper may be stacked in the  
paper do not  
feed.  
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and  
weight.  
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,  
clear the paper jam. (Page 14.3)  
Check the machine for the following:  
• The side cover is not closed. Close the side cover.  
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (Page 14.3)  
• No paper is loaded. Load paper. (Page 4.7)  
• The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not  
installed. Install the toner cartridge or imaging unit.  
If a system error occurs, contact your service  
representative.  
Paper does not  
feed into the  
machine.  
• Remove any obstructions from inside the  
machine.  
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove  
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.  
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove  
excess paper from the tray.  
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that  
meets the specifications required by the  
machine. (Page 4.3)  
• If an original does not feed into the machine,  
the DADF rubber pad may require to be  
replaced. Contact a service representative.  
The connection cable Disconnect the printer cable  
between the  
and reconnect it.  
computer and the  
machine is not  
connected properly.  
14.14  
<Troubleshooting>  
             
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The  
The connection cable If possible, attach the cable  
Half the  
page is  
blank.  
The page orientation  
setting may be  
incorrect.  
Change the page orientation  
in your application. See the  
printer driver help screen.  
machine  
does not  
print.  
between the  
computer and the  
to another computer that is  
working properly and print a  
machine is defective. job. You can also try using a  
different printer cable.  
The paper size and  
the paper size  
settings do not  
match.  
Ensure that the paper size in  
the printer driver settings  
matches the paper in the  
tray.  
(continued)  
The port setting is  
incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer  
setting to make sure that the  
print job is sent to the correct  
port. If the computer has  
more than one port, make  
sure that the machine is  
Or, ensure that the paper  
size in the printer driver  
settings matches the paper  
selection in the software  
application settings you use.  
attached to the correct one.  
The machine may be Check the printer properties  
The  
The printer cable is  
loose or defective.  
Disconnect the printer cable  
and reconnect. Try a print job  
that you have already printed  
successfully. If possible,  
attach the cable and the  
machine to another computer  
and try a print job that you  
know works. Finally, try a  
new printer cable.  
configured  
incorrectly.  
to ensure that all of the print  
settings are correct.  
machine  
prints, but  
the text is  
wrong,  
garbled, or  
incomplete.  
The printer driver  
may be incorrectly  
installed.  
Repair the printer software.  
See Software section.  
The machine is  
malfunctioning.  
Check the display message  
on the control panel to see if  
the machine is indicating a  
system error. Contact a  
The wrong printer  
driver was selected.  
Check the application’s  
printer selection menu to  
ensure that your machine is  
selected.  
service representative.  
The document size is Get more hard disk space  
so big that the hard  
disk space of the  
computer is not  
enough to access the  
print job.  
and print the document  
again.  
The software  
application is  
malfunctioning.  
Try printing a job from  
another application.  
The operating system Exit Windows and reboot the  
is malfunctioning.  
computer. Turn the machine  
off and then back on again.  
The  
The paper option that For many software  
machine  
selectsprint printer properties  
materials  
from the  
wrong  
was selected in the  
applications, the paper  
source selection is found  
under the Paper tab within  
the printer properties. Select  
the correct paper source.  
See the printer driver help  
screen.  
Pagesprint, The toner cartridge is Redistribute the toner, if  
but they are defective or out of  
necessary.  
may be incorrect.  
blank.  
toner.  
If necessary, replace the  
toner cartridge.  
paper  
source.  
The file may have  
blank pages.  
Check the file to ensure that  
it does not contain blank  
pages.  
A print job  
isextremely complex.  
slow.  
The job may be very  
Reduce the complexity of the  
page or try adjusting the print  
quality settings.  
Some parts, such as  
the controller or the  
board, may be  
Contact a service  
representative.  
defective.  
14.15  
<Troubleshooting>  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,  
you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear  
the problem.  
PDF file  
does not  
print  
correctly-  
some parts  
are missing  
in the  
graphics,  
text or  
illustrations.  
Incompatibility  
between the PDF file  
and the Acrobat  
products.  
Printing the PDF file as an  
image may enable the file to  
print. Turn on Print As Image  
from the Acrobat printing  
options.  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Note: It will take longer to  
print when you print a PDF  
file as an image.  
Light or faded print  
If a vertical white streak or faded area appears  
on the page:  
• The toner supply is not enough. You may be  
able to temporarily extend the toner  
cartridge life. If this does not improve the  
print quality, install a new toner cartridge.  
• The color tone might not be adjusted. Adjust  
the color tone. (Page 12.12)  
• The paper may not meet paper  
specifications; for example, the paper may  
be too moist or rough. (Page 4.3)  
Before  
printing, the  
machine  
emits vapor  
near the  
output tray.  
Using damp paper  
can cause vapor  
during printing.  
This is not a problem. Just  
keep printing.  
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution  
setting is too low or the toner save mode is  
on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the  
toner save mode off. See the help screen of  
the printer driver and refer to Software  
section, respectively.  
Your  
The oil used to  
protect the fuser is  
evaporating.  
After printing about 100 color  
pages, there will be no more  
smell. It is a temporary issue.  
machine  
has an odd  
smell  
duringinitial  
use.  
• A combination of faded or smeared defects  
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs  
cleaning. Contact a service representative.  
• The surface of the LSU part inside the  
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,  
contact a service representative.  
The print  
quality of  
photos is  
not good.  
Images are  
not clear.  
The resolution of the  
photo is very low.  
Reduce the photo size. If you  
increase the photo size in the  
software application, the  
resolution will be reduced.  
Toner specks  
• The paper may not meet specifications; for  
example, the paper may be too moist or  
rough. (Page 4.3)  
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the  
inside of your machine. Contact a service  
representative.  
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact  
a service representative.  
• Check the location of the machine. If the  
area is not well-ventilated, this problem may  
occur. (Page 3.1)  
The  
Paper size and paper  
size setting do not  
match.  
Set the correct paper size in  
the Custom in the Paper tab  
in the printer propeties. See  
machine  
does not  
printspecial  
sized paper  
such as a  
billing  
Software section  
.
paper.  
Dropouts  
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur  
randomly on the page:  
• A single sheet of paper may be defective.  
Try reprinting the job.  
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven  
or the paper has moist spots on its surface.  
Try a different brand of paper. (Page 4.3)  
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing  
processes can cause some areas to reject  
toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.  
• If these steps do not correct the problem,  
contact a service representative.  
14.16  
<Troubleshooting>  
   
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
White Spots  
White spots appears on the page:  
Vertical repetitive  
defects  
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side  
of the page at even intervals:  
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from  
a paper falls to the inner devices within the  
machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.  
Clean the inside of your machine.  
(Page 13.2) Contact a service  
representative.  
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact  
a service representative.  
• The imaging unit may be damaged. If a  
repetitive mark occurs on the page, run a  
cleaning sheet through several times to  
clean the cartridge; contact a service  
representative. After the printout, if you still  
have the same problems, remove the  
imaging unit and then, install a new one.  
• Parts of the machine may have toner on  
them. If the defects occur on the back of the  
page, the problem will likely correct itself  
after a few more pages.  
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
• The drum inside the printer has probably  
been scratched. Remove the imaging unit  
and install a new one. (Page 13.6)  
• The fusing assembly may be damaged.  
Contact a service representative.  
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:  
• The surface of the LSU part inside the  
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU.  
Contact a service representative.  
Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner  
randomly distributed on the printed page.  
• The inside of the Imaging Unit may be dirty.  
Change the Imaging Unit.  
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing  
with a different batch of paper. Do not open  
packages of paper until necessary so that  
the paper does not absorb too much  
moisture.  
• If background scatter occurs on an  
envelope, change the printing layout to  
avoid printing over areas that have  
overlapping seams on the reverse side.  
Printing on seams can cause problems.  
• If background scatter covers the entire  
surface area of a printed page, adjust the  
print resolution through your software  
application or in printer properties.  
If vertical streaks appear on the page:  
• The surface of the scanner glass and its  
white sheet may be dirty. Clean these unit.  
See 13.2 . If this problem persists, contact a  
service representative.  
Color or Black  
background  
If the amount of background shading becomes  
unacceptable:  
• Change the IBT if it has reached its lifespan.  
• Check the environmental conditions: very  
dry conditions (low humidity) or a high level  
of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can  
increase the amount of background  
shading.  
Misformed  
characters  
• If characters are improperly formed and  
producing hollow images, the paper stock  
may be too slick. Try different paper.  
• Remove the old imaging unit and then,  
install a new one. (Page 13.4)  
• If characters are improperly formed and  
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit  
may need service. Contact a service  
representative.  
Toner smear  
• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a  
service representative.  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a  
new one. (Page 13.4)  
• Change the IBT if it has reached its lifespan.  
14.17  
<Troubleshooting>  
Condition  
Page skew  
Suggested solutions  
Condition  
Loose toner  
Suggested solutions  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
• Ensure that the paper or other material is  
loaded correctly and the guides are not too  
tight or too loose against the paper stack.  
• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a  
service representative.  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a  
new one. (Page 13.4)  
• If the problem persists, the machine may  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Curl or wave  
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high  
temperature and humidity can cause paper  
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Character Voids  
Character voids are white areas within parts of  
characters that should be solid black:  
• If you are using transparencies, try another  
type of transparency. Because of the  
composition of transparencies, some  
character voids are normal.  
You may be printing on the wrong surface of  
the paper. Remove the paper and turn it  
around.  
• The paper may not meet paper  
specifications. (Page 4.3)  
Wrinkles or creases • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
• Check the paper type and quality.  
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears  
appear:  
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
• The imaging unit may be installed  
improperly. Remove the cartridge and  
reinsert it.  
• The imaging unit may be defective. Remove  
the imaging unit and install a new one.  
Back of printouts  
are dirty  
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of  
the machine. Contact a service  
representative.  
• If the problem persists, the machine may  
require repair. Contact a service  
representative.  
Curl  
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not  
feed into the machine:  
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also  
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Solid Color or  
Black pages  
• The imaging unit may not be installed  
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert  
it.  
• The imaging unit may be defective and need  
replacing. Remove the imaging unit and  
install a new one. (Page 13.4)  
An unknown image  
repetitively appears altitude of 1,000 m (3,281ft) or above. The  
Your machine is probably being used at an  
on the next few  
sheets or loose  
toner, light print, or  
contamination  
occurs.  
high altitude may affect the print quality from  
loose toner or light imaging. You can set this  
option through Printer Settings Utility or the  
Printer Tab in printer driver’s properties. See  
• The machine may require repair. Contact a  
service representative.  
14.18  
<Troubleshooting>  
Copying problems  
Scanning problems  
Suggested solutions  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Copies are too light Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or  
The scanner does • Make sure that you place the original to be  
or too dark.  
lighten the backgrounds of copies.  
not work.  
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or  
face up in the DADF.  
• There may not be enough available memory  
to hold the document you want to scan. Try  
the Prescan function to see if that works. Try  
lowering the scan resolution rate.  
Smears, lines,  
marks, or spots  
appears on copies.  
• If the defects are on the original, press Light  
and Dark arrows to lighten the background  
of your copies.  
• If there are no defects on the original, clean  
the scan unit. (Page 13.2)  
• Check that the printer cable is connected  
properly.  
Copy image is  
skewed.  
• Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.  
• Check that the copy paper is loaded  
correctly.  
• Make sure that the printer cable is not  
defective. Switch the cable with a known  
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.  
• Check that the scanner is configured  
correctly. Check scan setting in the SmarThru  
Configuration or the application you want to  
use to make certain that the scanner job is  
being sent to the correct port.  
• In case of use of account feature, make sure  
that you have extra scan count remained. For  
example, if you try to scan 10-page document  
while you have 5 scan count left, the scan job  
would be canceled.  
Blank copies print  
out.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the  
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.  
Image rubs off the  
copy easily.  
• Replace the paper in the tray with paper  
from a new package.  
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in  
the machine for extended periods of time.  
Frequent copy  
paper jams occur.  
• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in  
the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a  
fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides,  
if necessary.  
The unit scans  
very slowly.  
• Check if the machine is printing received  
data. If so, scan the document after the  
received data has been printed.  
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper  
2
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
• Communication speed slows in scan mode  
because of the large amount of memory  
required to analyze and reproduce the  
scanned image. Set your computer to the  
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It  
will help to increase the speed. For details  
about how to set BIOS, refer to your  
computer user’s guide.  
weight. 75 g/m (20 lb bond) paper is  
recommended.  
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy  
paper remaining in the machine after a  
paper jam has been cleared.  
Toner cartridge  
produces fewer  
copies than  
expected before  
running out of  
toner.  
Your originals may contain pictures, solids,  
or heavy lines. For example, your originals  
may be forms, newsletters, books, or other  
documents that use more toner.  
• The machine may be turned on and off  
frequently.  
• The scanner lid may be left open while  
copies are being made.  
14.19  
<Troubleshooting>  
       
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Message appears • There may be a copying or printing job in  
The original does  
not feed into the  
machine.  
• Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and  
you are inserting it in correctly. Check that  
the original is the right size, not too thick or  
thin.  
• Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed.  
• The DADF rubber pad may need to be  
replaced. Contact a service representative.  
on your computer  
screen:  
progress. Try your job again when that job is  
finished, try your job again.  
• The selected port is currently being used.  
Restart your computer and try again.  
• The printer cable may be improperly  
connected or the power may be off.  
• The scanner driver is not installed or the  
operating environment is not set up properly.  
• Ensure that the machine is properly  
connected and the power is on, then restart  
your computer.  
• “Device can't be  
set to the H/W  
mode you want.”  
• “Port is being  
used by another  
program.”  
• “Port is  
Disabled.”  
• “Scanner is busy  
receiving or  
printing data.  
When the  
Faxes are not  
received  
automatically.  
• The receiving mode should be set to Fax.  
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.  
• Check to see if the display shows any error  
message. If it does, clear the problem.  
• The USB cable may be improperly connected  
or the power may be off.  
The machine does • Make sure that the original is loaded in the  
not send.  
DADF or on the scanner glass.  
• Check the fax machine you are sending to,  
to see if it can receive your fax.  
current job is  
completed, try  
again.”  
• “Invalid handle.”  
• “Scanning has  
failed.”  
The incoming fax  
has blank spaces  
or is of poor quality.  
• The fax machine sending you the fax may be  
faulty.  
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
• Check your machine by making a copy.  
• The toner cartridge may have reached its  
estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner  
cartridge, referring to page 13.4.  
Samsung Scan Manager Problem  
Suggested solutions  
Stretched words  
appear on an  
incoming fax.  
The fax machine sending the fax had a  
temporary document jam.  
Samsung Scan  
Manager does not  
work.  
Check your system requirements. Samsung  
Scan Manager works in Window and  
Macintosh (Page 2.2.)  
There are lines on  
the originals you  
sent.  
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.  
(Page 13.2)  
Fax problems (optional)  
The machine dials  
a number, but the  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out  
of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
connection with the Speak with the other machine operator and ask  
other fax machine  
fails.  
her/him to solve out the problem.  
The machine is not • Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
working, there is no  
display and the  
buttons are not  
working.  
• Ensure that there is power being supplied to  
the electrical outlet.  
Faxes do not store There may not be enough memory space to  
in memory.  
store the fax. If the display shows the low  
memory message, delete any faxes you no  
longer need from the memory and then try to  
store the fax again. Please call for service.  
No dial tone  
sounds.  
• Check that the phone line is properly  
connected.  
Blank areas  
You may have chosen the wrong paper  
settings in the user option setting. For details  
about paper settings. (Page 4.9)  
• Check that the phone socket on the wall is  
working by plugging in another phone.  
appear at the  
bottom of each  
page or on other  
pages, with a small  
strip of text at the  
top.  
The numbers  
stored in memory  
do not dial  
Make sure that the numbers are stored in  
memory correctly. Print a Fax Phone Book.  
(Page 6.8)  
correctly.  
14.20  
<Troubleshooting>  
   
Common Windows problems  
Common PostScript problems  
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when  
several printer languages are being used.  
Suggested solutions  
“File in Use”  
message appears  
during installation.  
Exit all software applications. Remove all  
software from the StartUp Group, then restart  
Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.  
Note  
To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when  
PostScript errors occur, open the Print Options window and click  
the desired selection next to the PostScript errors section.  
“General  
Close all other applications, reboot Windows  
and try printing again.  
Protection Fault”,  
“Exception OE”,  
“Spool32”, or  
“Illegal Operation”  
messages appear.  
Possible Cause  
Solution  
PostScript file  
cannot be  
printed.  
The PostScript  
driver may not be  
installed correctly.  
• Install the PostScript  
driver, referring to  
Software section.  
• Print a configuration  
page and verify that the  
PS version is available  
for printing.  
• If the problem persists,  
contact a service  
“Fail To Print”, “A  
printer timeout  
error occurred.”  
messages appear.  
These messages may appear during printing.  
Just keep waiting until the machine finishes  
printing. If the message appears in standby  
mode or after printing has been completed,  
check the connection and/or whether an error  
has occurred.  
representative.  
Note  
“Limit Check  
Error” message  
appears.  
The print job was  
too complex.  
You might need to reduce  
the complexity of the page  
or install more memory.  
Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your  
computer for further information on Windows error messages.  
A PostScript  
error page prints. not be PostScript.  
The print job may  
Make sure that the print job  
is a PostScript job. Check  
to see whether the  
software application  
expected a setup or  
PostScript header file to be  
sent to the machine.  
The optional tray  
is not selected in  
the driver.  
The printer driver  
has not been  
configured to  
recognize the  
optional tray.  
Open the PostScript driver  
properties, select the  
Device Settings tab, and  
set the Tray option of the  
Installable Options section  
to Installed  
.
Window/  
The machine does not  
Try to print with the latest  
Adobe Reader program or  
print with turning on "Print  
as Image" option from  
Acrobat printing options. It  
might take longer to print  
when you print a PDF file  
as an image.  
Macintosh staple correctly when  
printing more than one  
copy from Acrobat  
Reader with a collate  
option.  
Linux  
The machine does not  
staple correctly when  
printing more than one  
copy with a collate option  
Turning off collation options  
on applications (including  
CUPS pstops collation option)  
may solve this problem. If you  
want to use the collation  
option, go to printer driver’s  
advanced option and turn the  
collation on.  
14.21  
<Troubleshooting>  
           
Common Linux problems  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
The machine does  
not appear on the  
scanners list.  
• Check if your machine is attached to your  
computer. Make sure that it is connected  
properly via the USB port and is turned on.  
• Check if the scanner driver for your machine is  
installed in your system. Open the Unified  
Driver configuration tool, switch to Scanner  
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure  
that the window lists a driver with a name  
corresponding to your machine's name. Check  
if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access to different  
“consumer” applications using the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one  
of them is allowed to gain control over the  
device at a time. The other “consumer” will  
encounter a “device busy” response. This  
usually happens while starting the scan  
procedure, and an appropriate message box  
appears.  
To identify the source of the problem, you  
should open ports configuration and select the  
port assigned to your scanner. The port symbol  
/dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation  
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1  
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /  
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /  
dev/mfp4 respectively, and so forth  
sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can  
see if the port is occupied with some other  
application. If this is the case, you should wait  
for completion of the current job or you should  
press the Release port button, if you are sure  
that the port owner is not functioning properly.  
The machine does not The CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System)  
print.  
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups-  
1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet Printing  
Protocol) printing.  
• Check if the printer driver is installed in your  
system. Open the Unified Driver configuration  
tool and switch to the Printers tab in the  
Printers configuration window to look at the list  
of available printers. Make sure that your  
machine is displayed on the list. If not, use the  
Add new printer wizard to set up your device.  
• Check if the printer has started. Open Printers  
configuration and select your machine on the  
printers list. Look at the description in the  
Selected printer pane. If its status contains  
“(stopped)” string, please, press the Start  
button. After that, normal operation of the  
printer should be restored. The “stopped”  
status might be activated when some  
problems in printing occurred. For instance,  
this could be an attempt to print documents  
when the port is claimed by a scanning  
application.  
• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access for different  
“consumer” application to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one  
of them is allowed to gain control over the  
device at a time. The other “consumer” will  
encounter “device busy” response. You should  
open the ports configuration and select the  
port assigned to your printer. In the Selected  
port pane you can see if the port is occupied  
by some other application. If this is the case,  
you should wait for completion of the current  
job or you should press the Release port  
button, if you are sure that the owner is not  
functioning properly.  
• Check if your application has special print  
options such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified  
in the command line parameter then remove it  
to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select  
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit the command  
line parameter in the command item.  
• The CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System)  
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups-  
1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet  
Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket  
printing instead of ipp or install later version of  
CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).  
14.22  
<Troubleshooting>  
     
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Solution  
The machine does  
not scan.  
• Check if a document is loaded into the  
machine.  
Some color images  
come out all black.  
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color  
space of the document is indexed color space  
and it is converted through CIE color space.  
Because Postscript uses CIE color space for  
Color Matching System, you should upgrade  
Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find  
recent Ghostscript versions at  
• Check if your machine is connected to the  
computer. Make sure it is connected properly if  
an I/O error is reported while scanning.  
• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional  
components of MFP (printer and scanner)  
share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access for different  
“consumer” applications to the same port is  
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one  
of them is allowed to gain control over the  
device at a time. The other “consumer” will  
encounter “device busy” response. This  
usually happens while starting the scan  
procedure, and an appropriate message box  
will be displayed.  
To identify the source of the problem, you  
should open ports configuration and select the  
port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol /  
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation  
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1  
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /  
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /  
dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth  
www.ghostscript.com.  
Some color images  
come out in  
unexpected color.  
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU  
Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color  
space of the document is indexed RGB color  
space and it is converted through CIE color  
space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space  
for Color Matching System, you should upgrade  
Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU  
Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find  
recent Ghostscript versions at  
www.ghostscript.com.  
The machine does  
not print whole pages printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of  
and its output is half  
page printed.  
It is a known problem that occurs when a color  
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to  
bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug  
688252.  
sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can  
see if the port is occupied by some other  
application. If this is the case, you should wait  
for completion of the current job or you should  
press the Release port button, if you are sure  
that the port owner is not functioning properly.  
The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.  
8.52 or above. Download the latest version of  
AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/  
projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this  
problem.  
I cannot scan via  
Gimp Front-end.  
• Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device  
dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you  
should install the Xsane plug-in for Gimp on  
your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in  
package for Gimp on downloaded Linux  
package (from Samsung website) or on the  
Gimp home page. For detailed information,  
refer to Help for Linux or Gimp Front-end  
application.  
If you wish to use an other kinds of scan  
applications, refer to the Help for application.  
I encounter error  
“Cannot open port  
device file” when  
printing a document.  
Please avoid changing print job parameters (via  
LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in  
progress. Known versions of CUPS server cut off  
the print jobs whenever print options are changed  
and then try to restart the job from the beginning.  
Since Unified Linux Driver locks port while  
printing, the abrupt termination of the driver  
keeps the port locked and therefore unavailable  
for subsequent print jobs. If this situation  
occurred, try to release the port.  
14.23  
<Troubleshooting>  
Common Macintosh problems  
Suggested solutions  
PDF file does not print  
correctly-some parts are  
missing in the graphics,  
text or illustrations.  
Incompatibility between the PDF file and  
the Acrobat products.  
Printing the PDF file as an image may  
enable the file to print. Turn on Print As  
Image from the Acrobat printing options.  
Note: It will take longer to print when  
you print a PDF file as an image.  
The document has  
printed, but the print job  
has not disappeared from  
the spooler in  
Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or  
higher.  
Mac OS 10.3.2.  
Some letters are not  
displayed normally  
during the cover page  
printing.  
This problem is caused because Mac  
OS cannot find the font during the cover  
page printing.  
Alphanumeric characters, in the Billing  
Info field, are only allowed for printing on  
the cover page. Other characters will be  
broken on the printout.  
When printing a  
Make sure that the resolution setting in  
your printer driver matches the one in  
Acrobat Reader.  
document in Macintosh  
with Acrobat Reader 6.0  
or higher, colors print  
incorrectly.  
14.24  
<Troubleshooting>  
     
Caution  
15 Ordering supplies and  
accessories  
This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and  
accessories available for your machine.  
When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must  
be purchased in the same country where the machine was  
purchased. Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be  
incompatible with your machine, as configurations of print cartridges  
and other supplies vary, depending on the specific country.  
This chapter includes:  
Accessories  
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s  
performance and capacity.  
Note  
The following accessories are available for your machine:  
The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact  
your sales representatives whether the part you want is available  
in your country.  
Accessory  
Description  
Part number  
Memory module Extand your machine’s CLX-MEM400:1GB  
memory capacity.  
Supplies  
Fax option kit  
This kit lets you use  
your machine as a fax  
machine.  
SCX-FAX210  
When the toner runs out or, the life span of the supplies expires you can  
order the following types of toner cartridges and supplies for your  
machine:  
Note: After installing  
the kit, you have to set  
up your machine to  
activate this machine.  
(See Page 16.3)  
a
Type  
Yield  
Part number  
Toner cartridge  
Average continuous  
black cartridge yield:  
20,000 standard  
pages.  
CLX-K8540A (Black)  
Optional tray 2/3 If you are experiencing SCX-S6555A  
frequent paper supply  
problems, you can  
attach up to two  
additonal 520 sheet  
trays. You can print  
documents in various  
sizes and types of print  
materials in each tray.  
Average continuous  
colored cartridge yield:  
15,000 standard pages  
(Yellow/Magenta/  
Cyan)  
CLX-C8540A (Cyan)  
CLX-M8540A  
(Magenta)  
CLX-Y8540A (Yellow)  
CLX-R8540K (Black)  
CLX-R8540C (Cyan)  
High Capacity  
Feeder  
If you are frequently  
experiencing paper  
supply problems, you  
can attach an  
SCX-HCF100  
Imaging unit  
Approx. 30,000 pages  
Caution: When using  
the optional High  
Capacity Feeder, you  
must install the foot as  
shown in the Optional  
High Capacity Feeder  
Install Guide provided  
with the optional High  
Capacity Feeder.  
additional 2,100 sheet  
tray.  
CLX-R8540M  
(Magenta)  
CLX-R8540Y (Yellow)  
Waste toner  
container  
Approx.  
48,000 images  
CLX-W8380A  
b
Otherwise, the  
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.  
b. Image counts are based on one color on each page. If you print documents in  
full color (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black), the image count will be added by 4  
images.  
machine can fall down  
and break, causing  
injury to human.  
15.1  
<Ordering supplies and accesso-  
               
Accessory  
Stand  
Description  
Part number  
Accessory  
Description  
Part number  
SCX-FIN20S  
You can place the  
machine on the  
ergonomically-  
Tall Stand: SCX-  
DSK10T  
• Short Stand: SCX-  
DSK10S  
Caution: When using  
the optional Stand, you  
must install the foot as  
shown in the Optional  
Stand Install Guide  
provided with the  
optional Stand.  
2-Bin Finisher  
The 2-Bin Finisher  
consists of big size  
output tray which holds  
up to 500 sheets of  
paper and small size  
output tray which holds  
up to 100 sheets of  
paper.  
(Stacker  
&Stapler)  
designed cabinet which  
lets you reach the  
machine conveniently.  
Also, you can easily  
move the cabinet with  
its wheels, if necessary,  
and store  
miscellaneous items  
like papers into the  
cabinet.  
Finisher  
500 sheets  
SCX-FIN11S  
(Stacker  
&Stapler)  
Otherwise, the  
machine can fall down  
and break, causing  
injury to human.  
How to purchase  
Note: If you do not use  
the optional tray then  
Tall Stand is  
recommended. In case  
you add two optional  
trays, use Short Stand.  
To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local  
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or  
visit www.samsung.com/supplies and select your country/region to obtain  
information on calling for technical support.  
Staple Cartridge 3 x 5,000 staples per  
package, covers  
SCX-STP000  
maximum thickness of  
50 sheets, 1 staple  
position.  
FDI (Foreign  
Device  
Interface) kit  
This card is installed  
inside the machine to  
allow a third party  
SCX-KIT20F  
device such as a coin  
operated device or a  
card reader. Those  
devices allow the pay-  
for-print service on  
your machine.  
SmarThru  
Workflow  
Windows 2000/XP/  
2003. This feature lets  
you send additional  
information along with  
the scanned document  
to a specified network  
location.  
SCX-KIT11S  
4-Bin Mailbox  
You can load up to 100 SCX-MBT40S  
sheets of paper in each  
stacker.  
To use 4-Bin Mailbox,  
you need to purchase  
and install 2-Bin  
Finisher first.  
15.2  
<Ordering supplies and accesso-  
         
2
Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you.  
16Installing accessories  
Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet  
most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user may have  
different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories  
available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.  
This chapter includes:  
1
control board cover  
1
Precautions to take when installing accessories  
3
4
Take out a new memory module from the plastic bag.  
Disconnect the power cord  
Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory  
module on the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the  
notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.  
Never remove the control board cover while the power is being supplied on.  
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the  
power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external  
accessories.  
Discharge static electricity  
The control board and internal accessories (network interface or DIMM) are  
sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or removing any internal  
accessories, discharge static electricity from your body by touching  
something metal, such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a  
grounded power source. If you walk round before finishing the installation,  
repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again.  
5
Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a  
'click'.  
Installing a memory module  
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot. Use this  
memory module slot to install additional memory.  
The order information is provided for optional memory module. (Page 15.1)  
1
Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.  
Note  
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match  
those on an actual DIMM and its slot.  
6
7
Replace the control board cover.  
Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine  
on.  
16.1  
<Installing accessories>  
         
Activating the added memory in the PS printer  
properties  
Replacing the Stapler  
When the stapler is completely empty, the message for installing the  
staple cartridge appears on the display screen.  
After installing the memory DIMM, you need to select it in the printer  
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.  
1
Open the finisher cover.  
1
Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your  
computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see  
Software section.  
2
3
Click the Windows Start menu.  
For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.  
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.  
For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and  
Sound > Printers.  
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >  
Devices and Printers.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >  
Devices and Printers.  
4
Select the Samsung CLX-8540 Series PS printer.  
2
Pull the stapler unit out.  
Click the right mouse button on the machine icon and select  
Properties.  
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,  
select the Printer properties.  
Note  
If Printer properties item has X mark, you can select other  
printer drivers connected with selected printer.  
5
6
7
Select Device Settings.  
select the Installable Options section and set the necessary options.  
Click OK.  
3
Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit.  
4
Unpack the new staple cartridge.  
16.2  
<Installing accessories>  
     
5
Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit.  
6
Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place.  
7
Close the finisher cover.  
Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax  
option kit  
After installing the Fax kit, you have to set up the machine in order to use  
this function.  
1
2
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Press Admin Setting.  
When the login message appears, enter password with number  
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)  
4
5
Press the General tab.  
Press the Country.  
Change the country, then some the values for fax and paper size will  
be changed automatically for your country.  
16.3  
<Installing accessories>  
     
Item  
Description  
15Specifications  
b
Noise level  
This chapter includes:  
Boot-up time  
• Less than 30 seconds (from sleep mode)  
• Less than 70 seconds (from power off)  
The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is  
a lot in the HDD  
Operating  
environment  
Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C (50° F to 89.6° F)  
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH  
General specifications  
Display  
7 inch WVGA (800 x 480) Color-TFT graphic LCD  
with Touch-Screen, 16 bit color (64k Color)  
Description  
a
2
DADF Capacity  
Up to 100 sheets 75 g/m (20 lb bond)  
DADF document  
size  
• Width:  
69 (2.7 inches) to 216 (8.5 inches) mm  
Consumables  
Life  
c
• Length:  
145 (5.7 inches) to 356 (14.0 inches) mm  
Paper input  
capacity  
• Tray 1  
2
500 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m  
[20 lb(75 g/m ) bond 520 sheets]  
2
Memory  
Standard: 1,280 MB (1,024 MB main memory and  
256 MB fixed IP memory)  
• Multi-purpose tray  
100 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m  
2
Maximum: Expandable to 2,304 MB  
(20 lb bond)  
• Optional tray 2/3  
Slots: One available DIMM slot for expandable  
memory.  
2
500 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m  
2
[20 lb(75 g/m ) bond 520 sheets]  
External  
dimension  
(W x D x H)  
606.8 x 575.0 x 815.5 mm (without optional  
trays), 23.89 x 22.64 x 32.11 inches  
• Optional High capacity tray  
2
1,950 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m  
2
[20 lb(75 g/m ) bond 2,100 sheets]  
Weight  
(including  
consumables)  
71.5 Kg (157.63 lbs)  
For details about paper input capacity, see  
2
Paper output  
capacity  
• Face down: 500 sheets 75 g/m (20 lb bond)  
Package weight  
Paper: 9.7 Kg ( 21.38 lbs), Plastic: 2.7 Kg (5.95  
lbs)  
2
• Optional Stacker: 500 sheets 75 g/m (20 lb  
bond)  
2
Fusing  
temperature  
175° C (347° F)  
• 2-Bin Finisher: 600 sheets 75 g/m (20 lb bond)  
• 2-Bin Finisher & 4-Bin Mail box: 1000 sheets  
2
75 g/m (20 lb bond)  
a. DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder): The machine with this feature  
scans both sides of a paper.  
b. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic  
installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.  
c. May be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and  
media size.  
Power rating  
AC 110 - 127 V or AC 220 - 240 V  
See the Rating label on the machine for the  
correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of  
current for your machine.  
d. It varies depending on the product configuration.  
e. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.  
f. Image counts are based on one color on each page. If you print documents in  
full color (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black), the image count will be added by 4  
images.  
Power  
consumption  
• Average operation mode: Less than 650 W  
• Power save mode: Less than 20 W  
• Standby mode: Less than 100 W  
• Power off mode: 1 W  
17.1  
<Specifications>  
         
Printer specifications  
Copier specifications  
Description  
Description  
a
Copy speed  
Up to 38 cpm in A4 (40 cpm in Letter)  
Printing method  
Color Laser Beam Printing  
a
Printing speed  
Up to 38 ppm in A4  
(40 ppm in Letter)  
First copy out  
time  
• From ready: Less than 13 seconds  
• From coldboot: Less than 85 seconds  
Duplex printing speed Up to 33 ppm in A4  
(35 ppm in Letter)  
Copy resolution  
DADF  
• Scan: Up to 300 x 300 dpi  
First print out time  
Black & White  
(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)  
• From ready: Less than 14 seconds  
• From coldboot: Less than 85 seconds  
• Print: Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)  
Color  
Scanner glass (Platen)  
• From ready: Less than 14 seconds  
• From coldboot: Less than 85 seconds  
• Scan: Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)  
Print resolution  
Up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output (600 x  
600 x 4 dpi)  
• Print: Up to 600 x 600 dpi (text, text/photo, magazine)  
Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (photo)  
Printer language  
PCL5ce, PCL6, PostScript 3, PDF Direct  
V1.4  
Zoom rate  
• Scanner glass (Platen): 25 to 400%  
• DADF: 25 to 200%  
b
OS compatibility  
• Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/  
2008 R2  
Multiple copies  
1 to 999 copies  
• Various Linux OS  
a. SDMC: Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy.  
• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6  
• High Speed USB 2.0  
Interface  
• Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX  
a. Print speed will be affected by operating system used, computing  
performance, application software, connect on method, media type, media  
size, and job complexity.  
b. Please visit www.samsung.com/printer to download the latest software  
version.  
17.2  
<Specifications>  
   
Scanner specifications  
Facsimile specifications (optional)  
Description  
Compatibility  
Description  
Compatibility  
TWAIN standard / WIA standard  
ITU-T G3  
Scanning method  
DADF and Flat-bed Color CCD  
(Charge Coupled Device) module  
Applicable line  
Public Switched Telephone Network  
(PSTN) or behind PABX  
a
Resolution  
TWAIN  
standard  
Up to 600 x 600 dpi (Up to 4,800 x  
4,800 dpi by software  
enhancement)  
Data coding  
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG (Tx only)  
33.6 Kbps  
Modem speed  
a
Transmission speed  
Maximum document length  
Approx. 3 seconds/page  
WIA standard  
Scan to USB  
Scan to PC  
Up to 600 x 600 dpi  
100, 200, 300 dpi  
• Scanner glass: 356 mm (14  
inches)  
• DADF: 356 mm (14 inches)  
75,150,200,300,600 dpi  
100, 200, 300, 600 dpi (B/W)  
100,200,300 dpi (Gray, Color)  
Scan to Email  
Scan to Server  
Resolution  
Black &  
White  
• Standard  
Up to 203 x 98 dpi  
• Fine  
Up to 203 x 196 dpi  
• Super Fine (Fine photo)  
Up to 300 x 300 dpi  
Up to 406 x 392 dpi  
b
Scan File format  
PDF, TIFF, JPEG  
Effective scanning length  
• Scanner glass: 348 mm (13.7  
inches)  
• DADF: 348 mm (13.7 inches)  
b
Up to 203 x 392 dpi (Rx only)  
Effective scanning width  
Color bit depth  
Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)  
Color  
• Standard  
Up to 200 x 200 dpi  
• Fine  
• Internal: 36 bits  
• External: 24 bits  
Up to 200 x 200 dpi  
• Super Fine  
Up to 200 x 200 dpi  
Mono bit depth  
• 1 bit for Linearity & Halftone  
• 8 bits (External), 12 bits  
(Internal) for Gray scale  
Halftone  
Memory  
256 levels  
Grayscale  
256 levels  
HDD Stroe, 500 jobs  
Up to 200 numbers  
a. Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might differ.  
b. JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color.  
Auto dialer (Speed Dial)  
a. Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase"C" by ITU-T  
No.1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.  
b. Rx stands for receiving a fax.  
17.3  
<Specifications>  
   
CSV  
18Glossary  
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used  
to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as  
it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard  
throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.  
Note  
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by  
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing  
as well as mentioned in this user's guide.  
DADF  
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that  
will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that  
the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.  
ADF  
Default  
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will  
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can  
scan some amount of the paper at once.  
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its  
box state, reset, or initialized.  
DHCP  
AppleTalk  
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server  
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration  
parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally,  
information required by the client host to participate on an IP  
network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP  
addresses to client hosts.  
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc  
for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh  
(1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP  
networking.  
BIT Depth  
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to  
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher  
color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of  
bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically  
large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome  
or black and white.  
DIMM  
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds  
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing  
data, received fax data.  
DNS  
BMP  
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information  
associated with domain names in a distributed database on  
networks, such as the Internet.  
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft  
Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a  
simple graphics file format on that platform.  
Dot Matrix Printer  
BOOTP  
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print  
head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact,  
striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a  
typewriter.  
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to  
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the  
bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on  
them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of  
addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation'  
computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced  
operating system.  
DPI  
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for  
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher  
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.  
CCD  
DRPD  
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the  
scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD  
module to prevent any damage when you move the machine.  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone  
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line  
to answer several different telephone numbers.  
Collation  
Duplex  
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When  
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing  
additional copies.  
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that  
the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer  
equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.  
Control Panel  
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or  
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in  
front of the machine.  
Duty Cycle  
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer  
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan  
limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average  
capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For  
example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20  
working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.  
Coverage  
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on  
printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper  
has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has  
complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher  
and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the  
coverage.  
18.1  
<Glossary>  
   
ECM  
IEEE  
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built  
into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects  
and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are  
sometimes caused by telephone line noise.  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an  
international non-profit, professional organization for the  
advancement of technology related to electricity.  
IEEE 1284  
Emulation  
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of  
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B"  
refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable  
that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer).  
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results  
as another.  
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different  
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.  
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which  
is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the  
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.  
Intranet  
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity,  
and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share  
part of an organization's information or operations with its  
employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible  
service, the internal website.  
Ethernet  
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local  
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical  
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control  
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly  
standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread  
LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.  
IP address  
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices  
use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a  
network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.  
IPM  
EtherTalk  
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a  
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a  
printer can complete within one minute.  
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer  
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is  
now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
IPP  
FDI  
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for  
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and  
so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of  
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and  
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing  
solution than older ones.  
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine  
to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card  
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your  
machine.  
FTP  
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for  
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol  
(such as the Internet or an intranet).  
IPX/SPX  
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet  
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare  
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services  
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX  
having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local  
area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose  
(typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).  
Fuser Unit  
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It  
consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred  
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure  
that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is  
warm when it comes out of a laser printer.  
ISO  
Gateway  
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an  
international standard-setting body composed of representatives  
from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and  
commercial standards.  
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer  
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or  
a network that allows access to another computer or network.  
ITU-T  
Grayscale  
The International Telecommunication Union is an international  
organization established to standardize and regulate international  
radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include  
standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing  
interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow  
international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates  
telecommunication.  
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image  
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are  
represented by various shades of gray.  
Halftone  
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of  
dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while  
lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.  
ITU-T No. 1 chart  
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile  
transmissions.  
HDD  
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard  
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded  
data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.  
18.2  
<Glossary>  
JBIG  
OPC  
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression  
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for  
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be  
used on other images.  
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a  
virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer,  
and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.  
An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the  
printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets  
scratches from grits of a paper.  
JPEG  
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used  
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is  
the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the  
World Wide Web.  
Originals  
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or  
text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce  
others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else.  
LDAP  
OSI  
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking  
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over  
TCP/IP.  
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the  
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for  
communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to  
network design that divides the required set of complex functions  
into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are,  
from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport,  
Network, Data Link and Physical.  
LED  
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that  
indicates the status of a machine.  
MAC address  
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier  
PABX  
associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit  
identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in  
pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded  
into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as  
an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.  
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic  
telephone switching system within a private enterprise.  
PCL  
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language  
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an  
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL  
has been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and  
page printers.  
MFP  
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes  
the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a  
printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.  
PDF  
MH  
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format  
developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional  
documents in a device independent and resolution independent  
format.  
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the  
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax  
machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a  
codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently  
compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space,  
this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.  
PostScript  
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming  
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing  
areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.  
MMR  
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method  
recommended by ITU-T T.6.  
Printer Driver  
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the  
Modem  
computer to the printer.  
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital  
information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode  
transmitted information.  
Print Media  
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which  
can be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.  
MR  
PPM  
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by  
ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next  
line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the  
differences are encoded and transmitted.  
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for  
determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages  
a printer can produce in one minute.  
NetWare  
PRN file  
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used  
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the  
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.  
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.  
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with  
the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which  
simplifies many tasks.  
18.3  
<Glossary>  
Protocol  
TWAIN  
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,  
communication, and data transfer between two computing  
endpoints.  
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-  
compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be  
initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft  
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.  
PS  
UNC Path  
See PostScript.  
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access  
network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The  
format of a UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional  
directory>  
PSTN  
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of  
the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on  
industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.  
URL  
Resolution  
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents  
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates  
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the  
domain name where the resource is located.  
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The  
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.  
SMB  
USB  
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to  
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications  
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-  
process communication mechanism.  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the  
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and  
peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently  
connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.  
SMTP  
Watermark  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail  
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-  
based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are  
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-  
server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the  
server.  
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that  
appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were  
first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by  
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,  
currency, and other government documents to discourage  
counterfeiting.  
Subnet Mask  
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to  
determine which part of the address is the network address and  
which part is the host address.  
WIA  
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that  
is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can  
be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-  
compliant scanner.  
TCP/IP  
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol  
(IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol  
stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.  
TCR  
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each  
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of  
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after  
failed transmissions.  
TIFF  
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped  
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from  
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the  
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible  
and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have  
been made by various image processing applications.  
Toner Cartridge  
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner.  
Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which  
forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted  
by the heat of the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.  
18.4  
<Glossary>  
INDEX  
country setup 12.5  
Global 7.5  
Group 7.4  
Individual 7.4  
erasing background  
copying 5.11  
faxing 6.8  
A
admin setting 12.1  
altitude adjustment 12.3  
answering machine/fax 6.6  
authentication  
D
DADF  
network accounting 12.8  
printing a report 12.2  
cover 1.3  
scanning 7.9 9.5  
,
,
input tray 1.3  
output tray 1.3  
width guides 1.3  
darkness  
erasing punch hole 5.11  
error correction mode 12.5  
error message 14.10  
setting up 3.5  
,
auto center 5.11  
extension telephone 6.6  
copying 5.5  
faxing 6.8  
B
scanning 7.9  
,
Book copy 5.8  
F
date & time 3.5 12.2  
,
printing date&time in copied out 12.2  
default settings 3.7  
altitude adjustment 12.3  
changing the default settings 3.7  
energy saver 12.3  
language 12.3  
fax option kit  
enabling option feature after installing the  
ordering 1.2  
fax receiving  
C
CCD Lock 1.3  
cleaning  
,
inside 13.2  
outside 13.2  
changing the receive mode 6.6  
extension telephone 6.6  
in answering machine/fax 6.6  
in memory 6.7  
receiving in duplex 6.7  
secure receiving 6.6  
loading paper 3.6  
machine test 12.3  
measurements 12.2  
output option 12.3  
setting a fax header 6.3  
sound 12.3  
supplies management 12.3  
system timeout 12.3  
tray management 12.3  
tray setting 3.6  
scan unit 13.2  
Clear 1.5  
Clear All 1.5  
Clone copy 5.8  
collated 5.4  
color mode  
fax sending  
automatic resending 6.4  
delay sending 6.5  
duplex sending 6.3  
redialing the last number 6.4  
sending a fax 6.3  
sending a fax manually 6.4  
sending a priority fax 6.5  
setting a fax header 6.3  
faxing 6.8  
scanning 7.9  
,
control panel 1.3  
copy  
,
display screen 1.5  
document box 13.2  
driver  
copying 5.2  
covers 5.9  
duplex copy 5.3  
feature 2.2  
erasing background 5.11  
erasing edge 5.10  
making a booklet 5.8  
page number 12.5  
installation 3.3  
duplex  
fax setup 12.5  
faxing  
color mode 6.8  
copying 5.3  
faxing 6.7  
darkness 6.8  
poster 5.7  
scanning 7.8  
,
duplex 6.7  
reduce/enlarge 5.3  
shifting margin 5.11  
solving copy problems 14.19  
the size of the originals 5.3  
transparencies 5.9  
enabling the fax kit option 12.12  
erasing background 6.8  
original type 6.8  
phonebook 6.8  
printing a fax report 13.1  
resolution 6.7  
,
E
email address  
entering email addresses to input field 7.5  
copy setup 12.5  
1
 
solving faxing problems 14.20  
sending a fax 6.4  
optional service 12.12  
optional tray 1.2, 1.3, 15.1  
ordering supplies 15.1  
L
FDI  
language 3.6  
LED 1.5  
authentication 12.8  
dummy 1.4  
Interrupt 1.7  
Power Saver 1.7  
Status 1.7  
FDI (Foreign Interface Device)  
ordering 1.2 15.2  
original size  
,
copying 5.3  
finisher (Stacker & Stapler)  
connection 1.4  
scanning 7.8  
,
LINE socket 1.4  
Linux  
problems 14.22  
requirements 2.3  
original type  
ordering 1.2  
paper jam 14.9  
front cover 1.3  
,
copying 5.5  
faxing 6.8  
scanning 7.8  
,
FTP 7.7  
originals 4.1  
clearing jam 14.1  
loading in the DADF 4.1  
loading on the scanner glass 4.1  
output options 12.3  
M
Machine Info 12.1  
Machine Setup 1.8  
G
,
general settings 12.2  
machine status 12.2  
Machine Status 1.8  
Macintosh  
Gray scan 7.9  
Group  
,
P
Group fax number 6.9  
problems 14.24  
requirements 2.3  
page numbering in copying 12.5  
paper  
Mailbox  
changing the size 4.8  
clearing jam 14.3  
I
creating Mailbox 6.11  
deleting the data of the Mailbox 6.12  
Mailbox List 6.11  
Mailbox No. 6.11  
Mailbox Passcode 6.11  
polling 6.11  
ID copy 5.6  
Individual  
loading in the multi-purpose tray 4.8  
loading in the optional tray 4.7  
loading in the tray1 4.7  
paper feeding problems 14.14  
setting the paper size of the tray 4.9  
phonebook  
email addresses for scanning 7.4  
individual fax number 6.8  
Interrupt 1.5  
printing a Mailbox 6.12  
sending to remote Mailbox 6.12  
storing the originals 6.12  
Maintenance 13.1  
maintenance parts 13.9  
toner cartridge 13.3  
memory DIMM  
fax 6.8  
J
jam  
fax phonebook from SyncThru Web Ser-  
vice 6.9  
clearing paper from the duplex unit area  
clearing paper from the exit area 14.7  
clearing paper from the fuser unit 14.8  
clearing paper from the multi-purpose tray  
polling  
deleting the polling document 6.10  
polling a remote fax 6.11  
polling from remote Mailbox 6.11  
printing the polling document 6.10  
storing the originals for polling 6.10  
PostScript  
installing 16.1  
message on the display screen 14.10  
multi-purpose tray 1.3  
,
clearing paper from the optional tray 14.5  
,
driver features 2.2  
clearing paper from the stacker (finisher)  
clearing paper from the tray1 14.3  
clearing the original from DADF 14.1  
clearing the original from scanner glass  
problems 14.21  
Power Save 3.6  
N
network  
Power Saver 1.5  
hardware 1.5  
using power save mode 3.6  
print media  
,
port 1.4  
requirements 3.2  
,
,
setting up 3.2  
notification  
receiving a fax in Mailbox 6.12  
N-up copy 5.7  
,
tips for avoiding paper jams 14.10  
guidelines 4.4  
media sizes 4.4  
selecting print media 4.2  
specification 4.3  
Job Status 1.5 1.8  
,
,
print/report  
accounting reports 12.15  
configuration report 12.15  
e-mail confirmation report 12.15  
fax report 12.15  
K
O
keyboard 3.7  
OCR 7.9  
,
On Hook Dial 1.5  
hardware 1.5  
2
from the website 13.9  
network auth. log report 12.15  
network configuration 12.15  
PCL font list 12.15  
PS3 font list 12.15  
scan report 13.1  
confirmation 12.15  
scanned file format 7.10  
scanning  
problem solving 14.14  
,
tray  
adjusting the width and length 4.8  
optional tray 1.3  
tray1 1.3  
color mode 7.9  
darkness 7.9 9.4  
erasing background 7.9  
,
,
,
troubleshooting 14.1  
scan to server confirmation 12.15  
Schedule jobs report 12.15  
supplies information 12.15  
usage page report 12.15  
Printer software CD 2.1  
printing 8.1  
problem solving 14.14  
USB memory 9.6  
problems  
file format 7.10  
original size 7.8  
original type 7.8  
printing an email report 13.1  
quality 7.9 9.5  
resolution 7.8 9.3  
sending it via email 7.3  
sending it via FTP 7.7  
sending it via SMB 7.7  
,
,
,
U
USB  
,
port 1.4  
,
USB flash memory  
printing 9.6  
scanning 9.2 10.3  
,
copying 14.19  
solving scanning problems 14.19  
display message 14.10  
faxing 14.20  
Linux 14.22  
Macintosh 14.24  
paper feeder 14.14  
PostScript 14.21  
USB flash memory 9.2  
serial number 13.1  
service center registration 12.2  
shifting margin 5.11  
side cover 1.3  
,
W
waste toner container  
replace 13.8  
Windows  
problems 14.21  
requirements 2.2  
SMB 7.7  
sound 12.3  
printing 14.14  
printing quality 14.16  
scanning 14.19  
specifications 17.1  
speed dial no. 6.8  
,
touch screen 14.14  
Windows 14.21  
Stacker 1.2  
staple cartridge  
ordering 1.2  
replacing 16.2  
Start 1.5  
Stop 1.5  
,
,
,
,
Q
quality  
scanning 7.9  
,
supplied software 2.1  
supplies  
solving the printing problem 14.16  
browsing the supplies life 12.2  
checking the supplies life 13.1  
expected imaging unit life 12.3  
expected toner cartridge life 12.3  
management 12.3  
R
,
Redial/Pause 1.5  
remote code 12.5  
replacing  
,
ordering supplies 15.1  
Supplies Management 12.3  
SyncThru Web Service 13.9  
email address 7.3  
fax settings 6.9  
SMB/FTP setting 7.7  
System timeout 3.6  
waste toner container 13.8  
replacing components  
imaging unit 13.6  
toner cartridge 13.4  
replacing stapler 16.2  
Report 12.15  
Resolution  
faxing 6.7  
scanning 7.8 9.3  
,
T
telephone 6.6  
terminal ID 12.5  
S
,
Scan to Email 7.3  
toner cartridge 1.3  
toner reorder notification 13.2  
touch screen  
confirmation 12.15  
Scan to Server 7.7  
3
REV 2.00  
Samsung Printer  
Software section  
SOFTWARE SECTION  
CONTENTS  
1
2
3
Typical Installation  
1
Installing Printer  
Software in Windows  
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
This chapter includes:  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008  
Server R2 click Start All programs Accessories  
Run  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which  
represents your drive and click OK and type  
X” with the  
.
NOTE: The following procedure is based on Windows XP, for  
other operating systems, refer to the corresponding Windows  
user's guide or online help.  
.
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista,  
Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run  
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click  
Continue in the User Account Control window.  
Installing Printer Software  
3
Click Next.  
You can install the printer software for local printing or network  
printing. To install the printer software on the computer,  
perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on  
the printer in use.  
A printer driver is software that lets your computer  
communicate with your printer. The procedure to install drivers  
may differ depending on the operating system you are using.  
All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning  
installation.  
Installing Software for Local Printing  
A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer  
using the printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a USB  
or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a network, skip  
page 8.  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom  
method.  
NOTE: If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears  
during the installation procedure, click  
in the upper right  
corner of the box to close the window, or click Cancel  
.
5
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
         
4
Select Typical installation for a local printer. Click  
Next  
and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web  
site.  
.
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
Custom Installation  
You can choose individual components to install.  
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  
and powered on.  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008  
Server R2 click Start All programs Accessories  
Run  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which  
represents your drive and click OK and type  
X” with the  
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The installation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
.
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista,  
Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run  
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click  
Continue in the User Account Control window.  
5
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the checkbox and click Next  
.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7.  
6
7
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order  
to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox  
6
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
3
Click Next.  
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
Select Custom installation. Click Next  
4
.
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The installation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
6
Select the components to be installed and click Next.  
5
Select your printer and click Next.  
NOTE: You can change the desired installation folder by  
clicking [Browse].  
7
8
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to  
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test  
page, select the checkbox and click Next  
.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 9.  
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes  
.
If not, click No to reprint it.  
7
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
9
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order  
to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox  
and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web  
site.  
3
Click Next.  
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
4
Select Typical installation for a network printer. Click  
Next  
.
Installing Software for Network  
Printing  
When you connect your printer to a network, you must first  
configure the TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have  
assigned and verified the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to  
install the software on each computer on the network.  
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom  
method.  
Typical Installation  
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network  
and powered on. For details about connecting to the  
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.  
click Next  
.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008  
Server R2 click Start All programs Accessories  
Run  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which  
represents your drive and click OK and type  
X” with the  
.
.
.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista,  
Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run  
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click  
Continue in the User Account Control window.  
8
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
 
• If you click the Advanced button, you can search a  
printer with the SNMP Community Name. Default  
name is ‘public.  
1
2
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network  
and powered on. For details about connecting to the  
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and  
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “  
letter which represents your drive and click OK  
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008  
Server R2 click Start All programs Accessories  
Run  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which  
represents your drive and click OK and type  
X” with the  
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,  
print a Network Configuration page in machine.  
.
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
.
.
• If you select Add TCP/IP Port, you can enter IPv4,  
IPv6 or the Hostname.  
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista,  
Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run  
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click  
Continue in the User Account Control window.  
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please  
turn off the firewall and click Update  
For Windows operating system, click Start  
.
3
Click Next.  
Control Panel  
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.  
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.  
6
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking  
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user  
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from  
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding  
checkbox(es) and click Finish  
.
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.  
Select Custom installation. Click Next  
4
.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
Custom Installation  
You can choose individual components to install and set a  
specific IP address.  
9
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
TIP: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific  
network printer, click the Set IP Address button. The Set IP  
Address window appears. Do as follows:  
click Next  
.
• If you click the Advanced button, you can search a  
priter with the SNMP Community Name. Default name  
is ‘public.  
a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the  
list.  
b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the  
printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP  
address for the network printer.  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
c. Click Next  
.
6
Select the components to be installed. After selecting the  
components, the following window appears. You can also  
change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on  
the network, set the printer as the default printer, and  
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,  
print a Network Configuration page in machine.  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
change the port name of each printer. Click Next  
.
• If you select Add TCP/IP Port, you can enter IPv4,  
IPv6 or the Hostname.  
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn  
off the firewall and click Update  
For Windows operating system, click Start  
.
Control Panel  
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.  
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.  
To install this software on a server, select the Setting up  
this printer on a server checkbox.  
7
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking  
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user  
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from  
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding  
checkbox(es) and click Finish  
.
10  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
Otherwise, just click Finish  
.
Reinstalling Printer Software  
You can reinstall the software if installation fails.  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
Samsung Printers  
Maintenance  
Select Repair and click Next  
your printer driver name  
.
3
4
.
The list of printers available on the network appears.  
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then  
click Next  
.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t  
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling  
• If you click the Advanced button, you can search a  
priter with the SNMP Community Name. Default name  
is ‘public.  
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to  
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your  
printer to the network. To add the printer to the  
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the  
printer.  
To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select  
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name  
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse  
button.  
• If you select Add TCP/IP Port, you can enter IPv4,  
IPv6 or the Hostname.  
You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any  
item individually.  
11  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
   
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the  
computer, the following window will appear.  
Removing Printer Software  
1
2
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
Samsung Printers  
Maintenance  
Select Remove and click Next  
your printer driver name  
.
3
.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any  
item individually.  
4
5
Select the components you want to remove and then click  
Next  
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,  
click Yes  
.
.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed  
from your computer.  
After the software is removed, click Finish  
.
• After connecting the printer, click Next  
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click  
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation  
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the  
installation.  
• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s  
Guide may differ depending on the printer and  
interface in use.  
5
Select the components you want to reinstall and click  
Next  
.
If you installed the printer software for local printing  
and you select your printer driver name, the window  
asking you to print a test page appears. Do as follows:  
a. To print a test page, select the check box and click  
Next  
.
b. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes  
.
If it doesn’t, click No to reprint it.  
6
When the reinstallation is done, click Finish  
.
12  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
   
NOTE: If you have installed a mono driver before, then the  
Use Existing Driver window. Select as the window explains,  
and click Next. Also, depending on your computer  
configuration, the printer sharing window or the print the test  
page window may appear; make the appropriate selection.  
Installing mono printer driver  
This printer provides you the printer drivers with a mono driver  
so you can use your printer as a monochrome printer. You must  
install the mono driver on your computer. Following steps guide  
you through the step by step installation process.  
1
2
3
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer  
and powered on. Or your computer and printer are  
connected to the network.  
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. The  
CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation  
window appears.  
14Enter your printer name, and click Next.  
15Click Finish to start installing a mono printer driver.  
NOTE: If your printer is connected to a network, go to  
printer's Properties and select the Ports tab, then click Add  
Portand Standard TCP/IP Port, and create a new port to  
connect to the printer. To create a new port, follow the  
procedure laid out in the wizard window.  
Click Cancel.  
If the confirmation window appears, click Finish.  
4
5
6
7
Click Start  
Select Add Printer  
When Add Printer Wizard appears, click Next  
Printers and Faxes.  
.
.
Select Local printer attached to this computer, and  
Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play  
printer, then click Next. Go to step 13.  
If your computer does not find the printer, then follow the  
next step.  
8
9
Select Next in the Select a Printer Port window.  
In the Select a Printer Port window, select Have Disk...  
.
10Click Browse to find a mono driver for your printer.  
ex) Windows XP 32 bit  
Select CD-ROM drive  
Printer  
PC_MONO  
WINXP_2000_VISTA-32  
11Select ***.inf file and click Open.  
12Click OK in the Install From Disk window.  
13Select a mono driver in the Printers field, and click Next.  
13  
Installing Printer Software in Windows  
 
The basic print settings are selected within the Print  
window. These settings include the number of copies and  
print range.  
2
Basic Printing  
This chapter explains the printing options and common printing  
tasks in Windows.  
This chapter includes:  
Make sure that your  
printer is selected.  
3
4
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your  
printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the  
application’s Print window. For details, see “Printer  
If you see Setup Printer, or Options in your Print  
,
window, click it instead. Then click Properties on the next  
screen.  
Click OK to close the printer properties window.  
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print  
window.  
Printing a Document  
NOTE  
:
NOTE  
:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible  
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility  
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
• The PostScript driver is recommended for best print image  
quality from PostScript-based applications such as Acrobat  
Reader®, Adobe Illustrator®, Adobe Photoshop®, etc.  
• If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, the Samsung  
AnyWeb Print too will save your time for screen-captured  
images or printing the image. Click Start  
>
All programs  
>
Samsung Printers  
>
Samsung AnyWeb Print  
>
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
Download the latest version to link the website where the  
tool is available for downloading.  
• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see  
an exclamation  
mark or  
mark. An exclamation mark  
means you can select that certain option but it is not  
recommended, and  
mark means you cannot select that  
Printing to a file (PRN)  
option due to the machine’s setting or environment.  
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your  
purpose.  
The following procedure describes the general steps required  
for printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps  
for printing a document may vary depending on the application  
program you are using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your  
software application for the exact printing procedure.  
To create a file:  
1
2
Open the document you want to print.  
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window is  
displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your  
application.  
14  
Basic Printing  
         
1
Check the Print to file box at the Print window.  
Printer Settings  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need when using your  
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can  
review and change the settings needed for your print job.  
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the  
Properties window for Windows XP.  
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you  
can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your  
Windows User’s Guide) .  
2
3
Click Print  
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then  
click OK  
For example c:\Temp\file name.  
.
NOTE  
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the  
software application first, and change any remaining settings  
using the printer driver.  
.
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes  
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.  
NOTE  
saved in My Documents  
:
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically  
.
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other  
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's  
Guide or online help.  
1. Click the Windows Start button.  
2. Select Printers and Faxes  
.
3. Select your printer driver icon.  
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Printing Preferences  
.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.  
15  
Basic Printing  
   
several pages. Paste printed pages together to form one poster-  
size document. For details, see “Printing Posters” on page 22.  
Booklet Printing option allows you to print your document on  
both sides of the paper to make into a booklet. For details, see  
Basic Tab  
Use Basic tab to adjust how the document appear on the  
printed page. Click the Basic tab to display the options shown  
information on accessing printer properties.  
Double-Sided Printing  
Double-Sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of  
paper. If this option does not appear, your printer does  
not have this feature.  
Paper Tab  
Use the Paper tab options to set the basic paper handling  
specifications. Click the Paper tab to display the options shown  
information on accessing printer properties.  
Orientation  
Orientation allows you to select the direction in which  
information is printed on a page.  
Portrait: prints across the width of the page, letter style.  
Landscape: prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet  
style.  
Rotate 180 Degrees: allows you to rotate the page the  
selected degrees.  
Copies  
Landscape  
Portrait  
Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.  
You can select number of copies to be printed for color and  
grayscale each. You can select from 1 to 999 copies.  
Quality  
The available Quality options may vary depending on your  
machine. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed  
characters and graphics. The higher setting may also increase the  
printing time of a document.  
Paper Options  
Paper Options allows you to choose paper tray you want to use.  
NOTE: When printing on an envelope, select the Envelope  
tab to set the options.  
Layout Options  
Layout Options allows you to select various ways to layout your  
document.  
Single Page Per Side is a basic layout option. This option  
allows you to print a page on one side of a paper.  
Size: This option allows you to set the size of paper to be  
loaded in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you  
can select it.  
Source: Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding  
paper tray.Use MP Tray when printing on special materials,  
such as envelopes and transparencies.  
Multiple Pages Per Side option allows you to print several  
pages on one side of a paper. For details, see “Printing Multiple  
Poster Printing option allows you to print your document into  
a poster-size document. This option prints your document into  
16  
Basic Printing  
       
-
-
-
No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between  
transparencies.  
Printed Separator: Places the same image on the divider  
sheets as printed on the transparency.  
Blank Separator: Places a blank sheet between  
transparencies.  
Type: This option allows you to set the type of paper to be  
loaded in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you  
can select it. This will let you get the best quality printout. If  
not, the desired print quality may not be achieved.  
-
Plain: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your machine is  
monochrome and printing on the 60 G./m2 (16 lb) cotton  
paper.  
-
-
-
Thick: 90 to 120g/m2 (24 to 32 lb) thick paper.  
Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb) thin paper.  
Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) cotton paper such as  
Gilbert 25 % and Gilbert 100 %.  
NOTE: If you click Reset, settings in the Advanced option  
returns to the default setting.  
-
-
-
-
-
Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper.  
Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) preprinted paper.  
Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) recycled paper.  
Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) envelope.  
Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2 (36 to 39 lb) transparency  
paper.  
Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb) label.  
CardStock: 120 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb) cardstock.  
Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) bond.  
Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the  
print-out for a long period time, such as archives, select this  
option.  
Scaling Options  
This option allows you to automatically or manually scale your  
print job on a page. This option can be grayed out according to  
the Layout Options setting in the Basic tab.  
Fit to Page: This option allows you to scale your print job to  
any selected paper size regardless of the document size. For  
-
-
-
-
Percentage: This option allows you to change the size of a  
page’s contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page  
by typing in a percentage you want. For details, see “Change  
-
-
Letterhead: 90g/m2(24 lb) letterhead.  
Punched:60~90g/m2(16~24 lb) punched paper.  
Output Bin: This option allows you to choose the output bin for  
prinouts.  
NOTE: You need to install an optional finisher such as 2-Bin  
Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.  
Advanced Paper Options  
:
First Page  
This property allows you to print the first page using a different  
paper type from the rest of the document. You can select the  
paper source for the first page.  
For example, load thick stock for the first page into the Multi-  
purpose Tray, and plain paper into Tray n. Then, select Tray n in  
the Source option and Multi-Purpose Tray in the First Page  
option.  
Cover Page  
This property provides you to print a cover page using a specific  
paper size and type from a specific paper source which you  
selected. If you configure the options to make printing on two-  
sided, the first 2 pages or the last 2 pages of document will be  
used as a front or back cover.  
-
-
No Covers: Prints the document without covers.  
Front Cover: Prints the document with a front cover. The  
front cover can be a blank paper or the first page in the  
document.  
-
-
Back Cover: Prints the document with a back cover. The  
back cover can be a blank paper or the last page in the  
document.  
Front and Back Cover: Prints the document with a front  
cover and a back cover. The covers can be blank papers or the  
first and the last pages in the document.  
Transparency Separator  
17  
Basic Printing  
choose Download as Bit Image and resubmit your print job.  
This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer  
driver.  
Download as Bit Image: This option allows the driver to  
download the font data as bitmap images. Documents with  
complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, or various other  
fonts, will print faster in this setting. Download as bit image is  
useful when printing from Adobe programs.  
Print as Graphics: This option allows the driver to  
download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents  
with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts,  
printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this  
setting.  
Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the  
printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident  
fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the  
fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts  
takes time, selecting this option can speed up your printing  
time. When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match  
the fonts used in your document to those stored in its  
memory. If, however, you use fonts in your document that are  
very different from those resident in the printer, your printed  
output will appear very different from what it looks like on the  
screen.  
Graphics Tab  
Use the Graphic tab options to adjust the print quality for your  
specific printing needs. Click the Graphic tab to display the  
for more information on accessing printer properties.  
-
-
-
NOTE:If you click the Reset button, settings in the  
Advanced option returns to the default setting.  
Color Mode  
You can choose color options. Setting to Color typically produces  
the best possible print quality for color documents. If you want to  
print a color document in grayscale, select Grayscale. If you  
want to adjust the color options manually, click Advanced  
button.  
Raster Compression  
This option determines the compression level of images for  
transferring data from a computer to a printer. If you set this  
option to Maximum, the printing speed will be high, but the  
printing quality will be low.  
Advanced: You can adjust the color options manually.  
-
Levels: You can manually adjust the level of color settings  
like brightness, contrast and more.  
-
Matching: You can choose the color mode among Default  
Graphic Controller  
Settings ICM Setting, and RGB Color (You can import the  
,
Fine Edge allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine  
lines for improving readability and align each color channel  
registration in color printing mode.  
color file you created with Samsung Easy Color Manager to  
).  
NOTE  
:
• If you click the Reset button, settings in the Advanced  
option returns to the default setting.  
• If you click the Import Image button, you can use the  
image you want to use for adjusting color settings. Click  
Default Image to use the default image.  
Font/Text  
Darken Text:Check this box to print all the text in your  
document darker than on a normal document.  
All Text Black:Check this box to print all the texts in your  
document in solid black, regardless of the color it appears on  
the screen.  
Advanced  
:
-
Download as Outline: This option allows the driver to  
download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document  
not stored (resident) on your machine. If, after printing a  
document, you find that the fonts did not print correctly,  
18  
Basic Printing  
       
Advanced: This option allows you to set advanced output  
options for printing, such as printing an information page, and  
saving as a form to later use as an overlay.  
Advanced Tab  
Use the Advanced tab to set various printing options. Click the  
Advanced tab to display the options shown below. See  
“Printing a Document” on page 14 for more information on  
accessing printer properties.  
NOTE:If you click the Reset button, settings in the  
Advanced option returns to the default setting.  
Job Settings  
This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing  
file by using the optional HDD.  
Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal which is for  
printing without saving the printing file in the optional HDD.  
User ID: This option is used when you need to find a saved file  
using the control panel.  
Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a saved  
file using the control panel.  
Samsung Tab  
Use the Samsung tab to display the copyright and the version  
number of the driver. If your computer is connected to the  
Internet, you can have access to following services:  
Click the Samsung tab to display the options.  
Watermark  
about accessing printer properties.  
This option allows you to print text over an existing document. For  
Help  
Overlay  
This option allows you to open the Help file by searching a  
keyword.  
Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and  
letterhead paper. For details, see “Using Overlays” on page 25.  
Service  
Output Options  
Check for updates: This option allows you to download  
updates for your printer driver.  
Print Order: This options allows you to set the sequence in  
which the pages will print. Select the print order from the drop-  
down list.  
Samsung Website: This option directly connects you to  
Samsung Website.  
-
-
-
-
Normal: This option allows you to print all pages from the  
first page to the last page.  
Reverse All Pages: This option allows you to print all pages  
from the last page to the first page.  
Print Odd Pages: This option allows you to print only the  
odd numbered pages of the document.  
Print Even Pages: This option allows you to print only the  
Registration: This option allows you to register your machine.  
Buy Supplies: This option allows you to order supplies on-  
line.  
Using a favorite setting  
The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab  
except for Samsung tab, allows you to save the current  
preferences settings for future use.  
even numbered pages of the document.  
Staple: This option staples the print outs.  
Request Offset If you don’t want the printout-sets to be in  
:
one stack, the machine places printout-sets slightly offset  
from one another.  
Output Mode: This option allows you to choose the way  
printouts are to be arranged.  
To save a Presets item:  
1
Change the settings as needed on each tab.  
NOTE: You need to install an optional finisher such as 2-Bin  
Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.  
19  
Basic Printing  
     
2
Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.  
3
Click Add. When you save Presets, all current driver  
settings are saved.  
If you click Add, the Add button changes to Update  
button. Select more options and click Update, settings will  
be added to the Presets you made.  
To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop  
down list. The machine is now set to print according to the  
setting you selected.  
To delete saved setting, select it from the Presets drop  
down list and click Delete  
.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by  
selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop down  
list.  
Using Help  
Click  
from the upper-right corner of the window, and then  
click on any option. The help screen gives detailed information  
about the printing features provided by the printer driver.  
20  
Basic Printing  
   
3
Advanced Printing  
This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing  
tasks.  
Printing Multiple Pages on One  
Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)  
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet  
of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will  
be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You  
can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.  
1
3
2
4
NOTE  
:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
2
3
4
From the Basic tab, choose Multiple Pages Per Side in  
the Type drop-down list.  
This chapter includes:  
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet  
(2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list.  
Select the page order from the Pages Order drop-down  
list, if necessary.  
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each  
page on the sheet.  
5
6
Click the Paper tab, select the Size Source, and Type.  
,
Click OK and print the document.  
21  
Advanced Printing  
         
Printing Posters  
Printing Booklets  
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4,  
9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets  
together to form one poster-size document.  
9
9
8
8
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
This printer feature allows you to print your document on both  
sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can  
be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.  
2
3
Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type  
drop-down list.  
Configure the poster option:  
NOTE: If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on  
Letter, Legal, A4, Us Folio, or Oficio sized print media.  
You can select the page layout from Poster 2x2 Poster  
,
3x3, or Poster 4x4. If you select Poster 2x2, the output  
will be automatically stretched to cover 4 physical pages.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access the printer properties. See “Printing a  
2
3
From the Basic tab, choose Booklet Printing from the  
Type drop-down list.  
Click the Paper tab, select the Size Source, and Type.  
,
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it  
easier to pasting the sheets together.  
NOTE: The Booklet Printing option is not available for all  
paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for  
0.15 inches  
this feature, select the available paper size in the Size option  
on the Paper tab.  
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be  
automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper  
0.15 inches  
without  
or  
mark).  
4
5
Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.  
4
5
Click OK and print the document.  
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the  
poster by pasting the sheets together.  
After printing, fold and staple the pages.  
22  
Advanced Printing  
         
Printing on Both Sides of Paper  
Change percentage of your  
document  
You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing,  
decide how you want your document oriented. You can only use  
this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized  
paper.  
You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or  
smaller on the printed page.  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
The options are:  
Printer Setting, if you select this option, this feature is  
determined by the setting you’ve made on the control  
panel of the printer.  
2
3
From the Paper tab.  
None  
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.  
Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in  
book binding.  
You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling  
rate.  
Short Edge, which is the type often used with calendars.  
2
4
5
Select the Size  
,
Source, and Type in Paper Options.  
2
Click OK and print the document.  
3
2
5
3
3
2
5
5
3
5
Long Edge  
Short Edge  
Fitting Your Document to a  
Selected Paper Size  
Reverse Duplex Printing, allows you to select general  
print order compare to duplex print order.  
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any  
selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This  
can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small  
document.  
NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies,  
envelopes, or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the  
printer may result.  
A
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. “Printing a  
2
3
4
5
From the Paper tab.  
2
3
From the Basic tab, select the paper orientation.  
Select the paper size you want from the Fit to page  
Select the Size Source, and Type in Paper Options  
Click OK and print the document.  
.
From the Double-sided Printing section, select the  
binding option you want.  
,
.
4
5
Click the Paper tab, select the Size Source, and Type.  
,
Click OK and print the document.  
NOTE: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should  
complete the printing job manually. The printer prints every  
other page of the document first. After printing the first side of  
your job, the Printing Tip window appears. Follow the on-  
screen instructions to complete the printing job.  
23  
Advanced Printing  
           
Editing a Watermark  
Using Watermarks  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing  
document. For example, you may want to have large gray  
letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally  
across the first page or all pages of a document.  
2
3
From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark  
drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current  
Watermaks list and change the watermark message and  
options.  
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the  
printer, and they can be modified, or you can add new ones to  
the list.  
4
5
Click Update to save the changes.  
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
Using an Existing Watermark  
1
2
3
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Deleting a Watermark  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark  
from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the  
selected watermark in the preview image.  
2
3
4
From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark  
drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
Click OK and start printing.  
Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current  
Watermaks list and click Delete  
NOTE: The preview image shows how the page will look when  
it is printed.  
.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
Creating a Watermark  
1
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
2
3
From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark  
drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.  
You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays  
in the preview window.  
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark  
prints on the first page only.  
4
Select watermark options.  
You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from  
the Font Attributes section, as well as set the angle of  
the watermark from the Message Angle section.  
5
6
Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current  
Watermaks list.  
When you have finished editing, click OK or Print until you  
exit the Print window.  
To stop printing the watermark, select None from the  
Watermark drop-down list.  
24  
Advanced Printing  
                 
Using a Page Overlay  
Using Overlays  
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with  
your document. To print an overlay with a document:  
1
2
Create or open the document you want to print.  
What is an Overlay?  
To change the print settings from your software  
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a  
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard  
disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on  
any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of  
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using  
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the  
exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To  
print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need  
to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need only  
tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your  
document.  
3
4
5
Click the Advanced tab.  
Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.  
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text  
drop-down list, select Edit from the list and click Load  
Select the overlay file you want to use.  
.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an  
external source, you can also load the file when you access  
the Load window.  
Creating a New Page Overlay  
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the  
Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the  
overlay from the Overlay List box.  
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay  
containing your logo or image.  
6
7
If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When  
Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window  
appears each time you submit a document for printing,  
asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your  
document.  
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for  
use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as  
you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.  
WORLD BEST  
2
3
To save the document as an overlay, access printer  
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been  
selected, the overlay automatically prints with your  
document.  
From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Text drop-  
down list. The Edit Overlay window appears.  
4
5
In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.  
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight  
characters in the File name box. Select the destination  
path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover.)  
The selected overlay prints on your document.  
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the  
same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.  
6
7
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.  
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your  
computer hard disk drive.  
Deleting a Page Overlay  
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the  
documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay  
with a watermark.  
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
1
2
3
In the printer properties window, click the Advanced tab.  
Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list.  
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay  
List box.  
4
5
6
Click Delete.  
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes  
.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
25  
Advanced Printing  
                 
Advanced  
You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced  
button.  
4
Using Windows  
PostScript Driver  
If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your  
system CD-ROM to print a document.  
PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer  
features and allow the computer to communicate with the  
printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the  
supplied software CD-ROM.  
This chapter includes:  
Printer Settings  
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need when using your  
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can  
review and change the settings needed for your print job.  
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your  
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the  
Properties window for Windows XP.  
Paper/Output this option allows you to select the size of the  
paper loaded in the tray.  
Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for  
your specific printing needs.  
Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript  
options or printer features.  
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this  
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
NOTE  
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify  
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the  
software application first, and change any remaining settings  
using the printer driver.  
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are  
using the current program. To make your changes  
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.  
Using Help  
You can click  
from the upper right corner of the window, and  
then click on any setting.  
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other  
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's  
Guide or online help.  
1. Click the Windows Start button.  
2. Select Printers and Faxes.  
3. Select your printer driver icon.  
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select  
Printing Preferences.  
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.  
26  
Using Windows PostScript Driver  
             
5
Using Direct Printing  
Utility  
Printing  
There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing  
Utility.  
This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF  
files without having to open the files.  
From the Direct Printing Utility  
window  
CAUTION  
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print.  
Deactivate the printing restriction feature, and retry  
printing.  
1
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs  
Samsung Printers Direct Printing Utility  
Direct Printing Utility  
.
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password.  
Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.  
Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on  
your desk top.  
• Depending on how a PDF file was created, it may not be able  
to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program.  
The Direct Printing Utility window opens.  
2
3
Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section  
• Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer,  
PDF files can or can not be printed using the Direct  
Printing Utility program.  
and click Browse  
.
Select the PDF file you will print and click Open  
.
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version  
1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file  
to print it.  
The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.  
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the  
next column.  
4
5
Click Print  
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
Using the shortcut icon  
Overview Direct Printing Utility  
1
Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to  
the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.  
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly  
to your printer without having to open the file. It sends data  
through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer  
driver. It only supports PDF format.  
The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.  
To installing this program, you should select Custom  
installation and put a check mark in this program when you  
install the printer driver.  
NOTE  
:
If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility,  
the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer  
opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.  
2
3
Customize the printer settings for your needs.  
Click Print  
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
.
Using the right-click menu  
1
Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct  
Printing  
.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is  
added.  
2
3
Select the printer you will use.  
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the  
below part.  
4
Click Print  
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.  
27  
Using Direct Printing Utility  
             
6
Sharing the Printer  
Locally  
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer,  
which is called “host computer,” on the network.  
Setting Up a Host Computer  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Start Windows.  
From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes  
.
Double-click your printer driver icon  
.
From the Printer menu, select Sharing  
.
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows  
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online  
help.  
Check the Share this printer box.  
Fill in the Shared Name field, and then click OK  
.
NOTE  
:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with  
your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of  
Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
Setting Up a Client Computer  
1
2
Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explore.  
Select My Network Places and then right-click Search  
for Computers  
.
3
Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name  
field, and click Search. (In case host computer requires  
User name and Password, fill in User ID and password  
of host computer account.)  
4
5
6
Double-click Printers and Faxes  
Right-click printer driver icon, select Connect  
Click Yes, if the installation confirm message appears.  
.
.
28  
Sharing the Printer Locally  
     
7
Scanning  
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into  
digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the  
files, display them on your web site or use them to create  
projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software  
or the WIA driver.  
Scanning Using SmarThru Office  
SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for your machine. You  
can use SmarThru Office to scan images or documents from local or  
network scanners.  
Starting SmarThru Office  
This chapter includes:  
Follow the steps below to start SmarThru Office  
:
1
2
3
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and  
properly connected to each other.  
Once you have installed SmarThru Office, you will see the  
SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.  
NOTE  
:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible  
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility  
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s  
Guide.  
Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.  
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-  
ROM.  
• The maximum resolution that can be achieved  
depends upon various factors, including computer  
speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the  
image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,  
depending on your system and what you are scanning,  
you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions,  
especially using enhanced dpi.  
4
The SmarThru Office appears.  
For more information, click Help  
>
SmarThru Office Help.  
Quick Start Guide  
This menu displays direct buttons for some features. The direct buttons  
include: Categories Binder Life Cycle Scan and OCR Fix and  
,
,
,
,
Enhance, and Samsung Website. You can disable this menu by  
checking “Do not show this diaglog again”.  
Using SmarThru Office  
Scanning  
1
Click Scan icon.  
NOTES  
:
• In Windows XP operating system, you can use SmarThru Office  
launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to easily open the Scan  
Setting window.  
In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the  
SmarThru Office icon in the tray area of the windows  
29  
Scanning  
           
taskbar to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.  
NOTE  
:
You need an email client program, such as <WIN-OS-  
UI>Outlook Express, to send email in SmarThru Office. Procedure for  
sending email may differ depending on email client program you are  
using.  
2
Scan Setting window opens.  
1
2
3
Select File  
An email client opens.  
Type in necessary information and send your email.  
>
Send to  
>
Send By E-mail.  
Fax  
You can send emails while working on SmarThru Office  
.
1
2
3
Select File  
Send Fax window opens.  
Type in necessary information and click Send Fax  
>
Send to  
>
Send By Fax.  
.
NOTE: For more information about SmarThru Office, click Help  
>
SmarThru Office Help. The SmarThru Office Help window appears;  
you can view on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program.  
Select Scanner: Allows you to select between the Local or  
Network scanner.  
Uninstalling SmarThru Office  
Select Profile: Allows you to save settings frequently used for  
future use. Click New Profile to save the setting.  
NOTE: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all applications are  
closed on your computer.  
Scan Settings: Allows you to customize settings for Scan Size  
and Paper Source  
.
Scan To: Allows you to customize settings for File Name and  
location to send scanned data.  
1
2
From the Start menu, select Programs  
>
Samsung Printers  
.
Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall SmarThru  
NOTE: Click Advanced button to set more scan options.  
Office  
.
3
4
When your computer asks you to confirm, read the statement and  
3
Set scan settings and click Scan  
.
click OK  
.
For more information, click Help  
>
SmarThru Office Help.  
Click Finish  
.
Scan To  
FTP  
You can upload files to an FTP server while working on SmarThru  
Office  
Scanning Process with TWAIN-  
enabled Software  
.
1
2
3
Select File  
>
Send to  
>
Send By FTP.  
Send By FTP window opens.  
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will  
need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe  
Photoshop. The first time you scan with your machine, select it  
as your TWAIN source in the application you use.  
Add your file and click Upload  
.
Email  
You can send email while working on SmarThru Office  
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:  
.
1
2
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
30  
Scanning  
     
OR  
Windows 2008/Vista  
Place a single document face down on the document  
glass.  
Open an application, such as Photoshop.  
Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
OR  
3
4
5
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
2
3
From the Start menu, select Control Panel  
Hardware and Sound Scanners and Cameras  
.
NOTE: You need to follow the program’s instructions for  
acquiring an image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the  
application.  
Double click Scan a document or picture  
.
Windows Fax and Scan appears.  
NOTE  
To view scanners, user can click on View scanners and  
cameras  
:
.
If there is no Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint  
program and click From Scanner or Camera... on File menu.  
Scanning Using the WIA Driver  
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition  
(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard  
components provided by Microsoft® Windows® XP and works  
with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the  
WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images  
without using additional software.  
4
5
Click New Scan. Scan driver appears.  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  
see your preferences affect the picture.  
6
Click Scan.  
NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with USB  
port except on Windows 2000.  
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel  
button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard.  
Windows XP/Server 2003  
Windows 7  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
OR  
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document  
glass.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
2
3
From the Start menu, select Settings  
Scanners and Cameras  
Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and  
Camera Wizard appears.  
Click Next.  
Control Panel  
2
3
From the Start menu, select Control Panel  
and Sound Devices and Printers  
Hardware  
.
.
Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in  
Printers and Faxes Start Scan  
New Scan application appears.  
.
4
5
Set the option in Choose scanning preferences window  
and click Preview to see how your options affect the  
picture.  
4
5
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to  
see your preferences affect the picture.  
6
7
Click Next.  
Click Scan  
.
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and  
destination to save the picture.  
8
9
Your picture has been successfully copied to your  
computer. Choose one of the options on screen.  
Click Next  
.
10Click Finish.  
31  
Scanning  
           
8
Using Smart Panel  
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the  
status of the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s  
Click this icon in Linux.  
settings. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user Smart Panel  
,
If you are a Windows user, from the Start menu, select  
is installed automatically when you install the printer software.  
If you are a Linux OS user, download Smart Panel from the  
Programs or All Programs  
Samsung Printers  
your  
printer driver name  
Smart Panel  
.
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
• If you have already installed more than one Samsung  
printer, first select the printer model you want in order to  
use the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows  
or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel icon and  
To use this program, you need:  
- Windows. To check for windows operating system(s) that  
are compatible with your printer, refer to Printer  
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.  
select your printer name  
.
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this  
Software User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer or  
Operating System in use.  
- Mac OS X 10.3 or higher  
- Linux. To check for Linux systems that are compatible with  
your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer  
User’s Guide.  
- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation  
in HTML Help.  
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the  
printer, the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s)  
and various other information. You can also change settings.  
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can  
check the supplied CD-ROM.  
Understanding Smart Panel  
1
If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears  
automatically, showing the error.  
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the  
Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or  
Notification Area (in Linux). You can also click it on the status  
bar (in Mac OS X).  
1
Toner Level  
You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner  
cartridge(s). The printer and the number of toner cartridge(s)  
shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in  
use. Any printers do not have this feature.  
Double-click this icon in Windows.  
Buy Now  
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.  
Troubleshooting Guide  
You can view Help to solve problems.  
Click this icon in Mac OS X.  
Printer Setting  
If you connect your printer to a network, the SyncThru  
Web Service window appears instead of the Printer  
Settings Utility window.  
Driver Setting (Only for Windows)  
32  
Using Smart Panel  
     
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to  
access all of the printer options you need for using your  
Opening the Troubleshooting Guide  
Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for  
error status problems.  
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the  
Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide  
.
Changing the Smart Panel  
Program Settings  
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the  
Smart Panel icon and select Options  
Select the settings you want from the Options window.  
.
33  
Using Smart Panel  
   
9
Using Your Printer in  
Linux  
Installing the Unified Linux  
Driver  
You can use your machine in a Linux environment.  
Installing the Unified Linux Driver  
1
Make sure that you connect your machine to your  
computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.  
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
This chapter includes:  
2
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
3
4
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the  
Unified Linux Driver package to your computer.  
Click the  
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the  
Terminal screen appears, type in:  
[root@localhost root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/  
UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz  
Getting Started  
You need to download Linux software package from the  
printer and scanner softwares.  
[root@localhost root]#cd [FilePath]/cdroot/Linux  
[root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh  
Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner  
drivers, providing the ability to print documents and scan  
images. The package also delivers powerful applications for  
configuring your machine and further processing of the scanned  
documents.  
NOTE: If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to  
install the software, you have to use the driver in the text  
mode. Follow the steps 3 to 4, and then follow the instructions  
on the terminal screen.  
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver  
package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via  
fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.  
5
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.  
The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the  
same local or network machine devices, sent by e-mail,  
uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred to an external OCR  
system.  
The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and  
flexible installation program. You don't need to search for  
additional components that might be necessary for the Unified  
Linux Driver software: all required packages will be carried onto  
your system and installed automatically; this is possible on a  
wide set of the most popular Linux clones.  
34  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
           
6
When the installation is complete, click Finish.  
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
2
Click the  
Terminal screen appears, type in:  
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the  
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/  
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh  
3
4
Click Uninstall  
Click Next  
.
.
The installation program has added the Unified Driver  
Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to  
the system menu for your convenience. If you have any  
difficulties, consult the onscreen help that is available  
through your system menu or can otherwise be called  
from the driver package Windows applications, such as  
Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager  
.
Installing the SmartPanel  
1
Make sure that you connect your machine to your  
computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.  
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in  
root in the Login field and enter the system password.  
2
5
Click Finish.  
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the  
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system  
administrator.  
3
4
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the  
Unified Linux Driver package to your computer.  
Click the  
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the  
Terminal screen appears, type in:  
[root@localhost root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/  
SmartPanel.tar.gz  
[root@localhost root]#cd [FilePath]/cdroot/Linux/  
smartpanel  
[root@localhost smartpanel]#./install.sh  
NOTE: If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to  
install the software, you have to use the driver in the text  
mode. Follow the steps 3 to 4, and then follow the instructions  
on the terminal screen.  
35  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
       
Printers Configuration  
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes  
.
Using the Unified Driver  
Configurator  
Printers Tab  
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by  
clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified  
Driver Configurator window.  
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for  
configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device  
combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver  
Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and  
scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port option  
responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and  
scanner via a single I/O channel.  
Switches to Printer  
configuration.  
After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver  
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.  
Shows all of the  
installed printer.  
Opening the Unified Driver  
Configurator  
Shows the status,  
model name and  
URI of your printer.  
1
Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the  
desktop.  
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select  
Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver  
Configurator  
Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the  
corresponding configuration window.  
.
You can use the following printer control buttons:  
2
Refresh: renews the available printers list.  
Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.  
Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.  
Printers Configuration button  
Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default  
printer.  
Scanners Configuration button  
(for MFP device only)  
Stop/Start: stops/starts the printer.  
Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the  
machine is working properly.  
Ports Configuration button  
Properties: allows you to view and change the printer  
properties. For details, see page 38.  
You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help  
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the  
Unified Driver Configurator.  
.
3
36  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
     
Classes Tab  
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.  
Ports Configuration  
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check  
the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy  
state when its owner is terminated for any reason.  
Shows all of the  
printer classes.  
Switches to  
ports  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
available ports.  
Shows the status of the  
class and the number of  
printers in the class.  
Shows the port type,  
device connected to  
the port and status  
Refresh : Renews the classes list.  
Add Class... : Allows you to add a new printer class.  
Remove Class : Removes the selected printer class.  
Refresh : Renews the available ports list.  
Release port : Releases the selected port.  
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners  
Scanners Configuration  
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices,  
view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device  
properties, and scan images.  
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the  
parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more  
than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to  
organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these  
devices via the single I/O port.  
The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an  
appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung  
printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices  
via so-called MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can  
be viewed via the Ports Configuration. The port sharing  
prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP  
device, while another block is in use.  
Switches to  
Scanners  
configuration.  
Shows all of the  
installed scanners.  
When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is  
strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an  
Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to  
choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the  
most suitable configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP  
scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers  
automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.  
Shows the vendor,  
model name and type  
of your scanner.  
Properties... : Allows you to change the scan properties  
37  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
   
Configuring Printer Properties  
Printing a Document  
Using the properties window provided by the Printers  
configuration, you can change the various properties for your  
machine as a printer.  
Printing from Applications  
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to  
print from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You  
can print on your machine from any such application.  
1
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.  
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.  
Select your machine on the available printers list and click  
2
3
1
From the application you are using, select Print from the  
File menu.  
Properties  
.
The Printer Properties window opens.  
2
3
Select Print directly using lpr  
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your  
machine from the Printer list and click Properties  
.
.
Click.  
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:  
General: allows you to change the printer location and  
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the  
printer list in Printers configuration.  
Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If  
you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice  
versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port  
in this tab.  
4
Change the printer and print job properties.  
Driver: allows you to view or select another printer  
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default  
device options.  
Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to  
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed  
jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.  
Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click  
Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or  
click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the  
selected class.  
4
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer  
Properties Window.  
38  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
             
The following four tabs display at the top of the window.  
General - allows you to change the paper size, the paper  
type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the  
duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes  
the number of pages per sheet.  
Scanning a Document  
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator  
window.  
Text - allows you to specify the page margins and set the  
1
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your  
desktop.  
text options, such as spacing or columns.  
Graphics - allows you to set image options that are used  
when printing images/files, such as color options, image  
size, or image position.  
2
3
Click the  
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.  
Select the scanner on the list.  
Device: allows you to set the print resolution, paper  
source, and destination.  
5
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties  
window.  
6
7
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.  
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the  
status of your print job.  
Click your  
scanner.  
To abort the current job, click Cancel  
.
Printing Files  
You can print many different types of files on the Samsung  
machine device using the standard CUPS way - directly from  
the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do  
that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by  
a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.  
To print any document file:  
1
Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command  
line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.  
When you have only one MFP device and it is connected  
to the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on  
the list and is automatically selected.  
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select  
file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files  
If you have two or more scanners attached to your  
computer, you can select any scanner to work at any  
time. For example, while acquisition is in progress on the  
first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the  
device options and start the image acquisition  
simultaneously.  
you want to print and click Open  
In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list,  
and change the printer and print job properties.  
.
2
3
For details about the properties window, see page 38.  
Click OK to start printing.  
4
5
Click Properties.  
Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF  
(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the  
document glass.  
6
Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.  
39  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
         
The document is scanned and the image preview appears  
in the Preview Pane.  
10When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.  
11Select the file directory where you want to save the image  
and enter the file name.  
12Click Save.  
Adding Job Type Settings  
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later  
scanning.  
To save a new Job Type setting:  
1
2
3
4
Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.  
Click Save As  
Enter the name for your setting.  
Click OK  
Drag the pointer to  
set the image area  
to be scanned.  
.
.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down  
list.  
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:  
1
Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-  
down list.  
7
Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan  
Area sections.  
2
The next time you open the Scanner Properties window,  
the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan  
job.  
Image Quality: allows you to select the color  
composition and the scan resolution for the image.  
To delete a Job Type setting:  
1
Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The  
Advanced button enables you to set the page size  
manually.  
Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type  
drop-down list.  
2
Click Delete  
.
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings,  
select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about  
the preset Job Type settings, see page 40.  
The setting is deleted from the list  
You can restore the default setting for the scan options  
Using the Image Manager  
The Image Manager application provides you with menu  
commands and tools to edit your scanned image.  
by clicking Default  
.
8
9
When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.  
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window  
to show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning,  
click Cancel  
.
The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager  
tab.  
Use these tools to  
edit the image.  
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar.  
For further details about editing an image, see page 40.  
40  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
 
You can use the following tools to edit the image:  
Tools Function  
Saves the image.  
Cancels your last action.  
Restores the action you canceled.  
Allows you to scroll through the image.  
Crops the selected image area.  
Zooms the image out.  
Zooms the image in.  
Allows you to scale the image size; you can  
enter the size manually, or set the rate to  
scale proportionally, vertically, or  
horizontally.  
Allows you to rotate the image; you can  
select the number of degrees from the drop-  
down list.  
Allows you to flip the image vertically or  
horizontally.  
Allows you to adjust the brightness or  
contrast of the image, or to invert the  
image.  
Shows the properties of the image.  
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer  
to the onscreen help.  
41  
Using Your Printer in Linux  
10After the installation is finished, click Quit.  
10  
Using Your Printer with  
a Macintosh  
Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB  
interface or a 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When  
you print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the  
PostScript driver by installing the PPD file.  
NOTE  
:
• If you have installed scan driver, click Restart  
• After the installation is finished, see “Setting Up the Printer”  
.
NOTE: Some printers do not support a network  
interface. Make sure that your printer supports a  
network interface by referring to Printer Specifications  
in your Printer User’s Guide.  
Uninstalling software  
Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software, or if  
installation fails.  
1
2
3
Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.  
Turn on your computer and printer.  
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the  
CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
This chapter includes:  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Double-click the Installer OS X icon.  
Enter the password and click OK  
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue  
Select Uninstall and click Uninstall  
The message which warns all application will close on your  
computer appears, Click Continue  
10When the uninstallation is done, click Quit.  
.
.
Installing Software  
The CD-ROM that came with your printer provides you with the  
PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple  
LaserWriter driver (only available when you use a printer  
which supports the PostScript driver), for printing on a  
Macintosh computer.  
.
Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a  
Macintosh computer.  
1
2
3
Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.  
Turn on your computer and printer.  
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the  
CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your  
Macintosh desktop.  
4
5
6
7
8
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
Double-click the Installer OS X icon.  
Enter the password and click OK  
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue  
Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is  
.
.
recommended for most users. All components necessary  
for printer operations will be installed.  
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual  
components to install.  
9
The message which warns all application will close on your  
computer appears, Click Continue  
.
42  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
           
For a USB-connected  
Setting Up the Printer  
1
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 42  
to install the PPD file on your computer.  
Set up for your printer will be different depending on which  
cable you use to connect the printer to your computer—the  
network cable or the USB cable.  
2
Open the Applications folder  
Setup Utility  
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open System Preferences from  
Utilities, and Print  
.
the Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax  
.
For a Network-connected  
3
4
Click Add on the Printer List  
.
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “  
+
” icon then a display  
NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface.  
:
window will pop up.  
Before connecting your printer, make sure that your  
printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer  
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.  
For MAC OS 10.3, select the USB tab.  
For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the  
USB connection.  
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the USB  
connection.  
1
2
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 42  
to install the PPD file on your computer.  
5
6
Select your printer name.  
Open the Applications folder  
Setup Utility  
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open System Preferences from  
Utilities, and Print  
.
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer  
name in Model Name  
.
the Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax  
.
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name  
3
4
Click Add on the Printer List  
.
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “  
window will pop up.  
For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.  
•For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer  
•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP  
+
” icon then a display  
in Model  
.
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work  
properly, select Select a driver to use... and your  
printer name in Print Using  
.
.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
.
5
Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type.  
7
Click Add.  
When printing a document containing many pages,  
printing performance may be enhanced by choosing  
Socket for Printer Type option.  
6
7
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address  
field.  
Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you  
cannot determine the queue name for your machine  
server, try using the default queue first.  
8
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer  
name in Model Name  
.
For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,  
select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name  
in Model  
.
For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work  
properly, select Select a driver to use... and your  
printer name in Print Using  
.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the  
default printer.  
9
Click Add.  
43  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
       
Changing Printer Settings  
You can use advanced printing features when using your  
printer.  
Printing  
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File  
menu. The printer name which appears in the printer properties  
window may differ depending on the printer in use. Except for  
the name, the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
NOTE  
:
• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in  
this User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.  
However the composition of the printer properties window is  
similar.  
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-  
ROM.  
NOTE: The setting options may differ depending on printers  
and Macintosh OS version.  
Layout  
Printing a Document  
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document  
appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on  
one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the Presets drop-down  
list to access the following features.  
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer  
software setting in each application you use. Follow these steps  
to print from a Macintosh.w  
1
2
3
Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want  
to print.  
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document  
Setup in some applications).  
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other  
options and click OK  
.
Make sure that your  
printer is selected.  
S
Mac OS 10.5  
Pages per Sheet: This feature determines how many  
pages printed on one page. For details, see "Printing  
Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper" on the next  
column.  
Layout Direction: You can select the printing direction  
on a page as like the examples on UI.  
S
Mac OS 10.3  
Border: This option allows you to print a border around  
each page on the sheet.  
4
5
Open the File menu and click Print  
.
Two-Sided: This option allows you to print on both sides  
Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which  
pages you want to print.  
6
Click Print when you finish setting the options.  
44  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
           
Job Accounting  
Graphics  
This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or  
change the password.  
The Graphics tab provides options for selecting  
Resolution(Quality) and Color Mode. Select Graphics  
form the Presets' drop-down list to access the graphic  
features.  
S
Mac OS 10.5  
SMac OS 10.5  
User permission: If you check this option, only users  
Resolution(Quality): You can select the printing  
resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity  
of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting  
also may increase the time it takes to print a document.  
with user permission can start a print job.  
Group permission: If you check this option, only groups  
with group permission can start a print job.  
Job Setting  
Color Mode: You can set the color options. Setting to  
Color typically produces the best possible print quality  
for color documents. If you want to print a color  
This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file  
by using the HDD  
.
document in grayscale, select Grayscale  
.
Paper  
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray  
from which you want to print. This will let you get the best  
quality printout. If you load a different type of print material,  
select the corresponding paper type.  
S
Mac OS 10.5  
Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal which is  
for printing without saving the printing file in the optional  
HDD.  
S
Mac OS 10.5  
User ID: This option is used when you need to find a  
saved file using the control panel.  
Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a  
saved file using the control panel.  
45  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
Optional Finisher  
Printer Features  
Advanced Options  
SMac OS 10.5  
SMac OS 10.5  
Output Mode This option allows you to choose the way  
:
printouts are to be arranged. (You need to install an  
optional finisher such as 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.  
Reverse Duplex Printing: Allows you to select general  
print order compare to duplex print order. If this option  
does not appear, your printer does not have this  
feature.  
)
Output Bin This option allows you to choose the output  
:
bin for prinouts. (You need to install an optional finisher  
such as 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.)  
Darken Text: Allows you to print all the text on your  
Staple  
:
This option staples the print outs.  
document darker than on a normal document.  
Request Offset: If you don’t want the printout-sets to  
be in one stack, the machine places printout-sets slightly  
offset from one another.  
Fit to Page: This setting allows you to scale your print  
job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital  
document size. This can be useful when you want to  
check fine details on a small document.  
Front Cover  
RGB Color: This setting determines how colors are  
rendered. Standard is the most widely used setting  
which the color tone of this mode is the closest to that of  
standard monitor (sRGB Monitor). Vivid mode is  
appropriate for printing presentation data and charts.  
The color tone of Vivid mode produces more Vivid color  
images than that of Standard mode. Device mode is best  
used for printing fine lines, small characters and color  
drawings. The color tone of Device mode may be  
different from that of monitor, the pure toner colors are  
used for printing Cyan, Magenta and Yellow colors.  
SMac OS 10.5  
Front Cover Option: Allows you to choose the option for  
printing a front cover page. You can choose to print the  
front cover blank, preprinted, 1-sided printed or 2-sided  
printed.  
Front Cover Source: Allows you to choose the paper  
source for the front cover.  
Front Cover Type: Allows you to choose the paper type  
for the front cover.  
46  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
Back Cover  
Transparency Seperator  
SMac OS 10.5  
SMac OS 10.5  
Back Cover Option: Allows you to choose the option for  
Transparency Seperator: You can place transparency  
printing a back cover page. You can choose to print the  
back cover blank, preprinted, 1-sided printed or 2-sided  
printed.  
separator sheets between printouts.  
Seperators Source: You can choose the source for  
seperators.  
Back Cover Source: Allows you to choose the paper  
source for the back cover.  
Smart Color  
Back Cover Type: Allows you to choose the paper type  
for the back cover.  
Front and Back Cover Option  
SMac OS 10.5  
Fine Edge:Allows users to emphasize edges of texts and  
fine lines for improving readability and align each color  
channel registration in color printing mode.  
SMac OS 10.5  
Front and Back Cover Option: Allows you to choose  
the option for printing a front and back cover page. You  
can choose to print the front and back cover blank,  
preprinted, 1-sided printed or 2-sided printed.  
Front and Back Cover Source: Allows you to choose  
the paper source for the front and back cover.  
Front and Back Cover Type: Allows you to choose the  
paper type for the front and back cover.  
47  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
of Paper  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.  
This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.  
Duplex Printing  
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the  
duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your  
finished document. The binding options are:  
Long-Edge Binding: Which is the conventional layout used in  
book binding.  
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the  
File menu.  
Short-Edge Binding: Which is the type often used with  
calendars.  
Select Layout  
.
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the  
File menu.  
Select the Layout  
.
S
Mac OS 10.5  
3
4
Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet  
of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop-down list.  
Select the page order from the Layout Direction option.  
S
Mac OS 10.5  
To print a border around each page on the sheet, select  
the option you want from the Border drop-down list.  
Click Print, and the printer prints the selected number of  
pages on one side of each page.  
3
4
Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing  
option.  
Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the  
paper.  
5
CAUTION If you have selected duplex printing and  
:
then try to print multiple copies of a document, the  
printer may not print the document in the way you  
want. In case of "Collated copy" , if your document has  
odd pages, the last page of the first copy and the first  
page of the next copy will be printed on the front and  
back of one sheet. In case of "Uncollated copy", the  
same page will be printed on the front and back of one  
sheet. Therefore, if you need multiple copies of a  
document and you want those copies on both sides of  
the paper, you must print them one at a time, as  
separate print jobs  
.
48  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
     
If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to  
select port  
If TWAIN UI appears, from the Preference tab, click  
.
Scanning  
Change Port.. to select port  
.
You can scan docoments using Image Capture program.  
Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program.  
For MAC OS X 10.5:  
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside  
your machine in Bonjour Devices  
.
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the MAC OS X  
10.4 procedure above.  
Scanning with USB  
1
2
3
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on  
and properly connected to each other.  
6
7
Set the scan options on this program.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).  
NOTE  
:
• For more information about using Image Capture, please  
Start Applications and click Image Capture  
.
refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.  
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as  
Adobe Photoshop.  
• Scan process differs according to TWAIN-compliant  
softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.  
NOTE: If No Image Capture device connected message  
appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the  
problem persists, please refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
4
5
Set the scan options on this program.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
• When scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update  
Mac OS to the latest version. Scanning operates propery in  
Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or higher.  
• For MAC OS X 10.3, use TWAIN-compliant softwares.  
NOTE  
:
• For more information about using Image Capture, please  
refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.  
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as  
Adobe Photoshop.  
• Scan process differs according to TWAIN-compliant  
softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.  
• When scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update  
Mac OS to the latest version. Scanning operates propery in  
Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or higher.  
Scanning with network  
1
2
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).  
3
4
Start Applications and click Image Capture.  
For MAC OS X 10.4~10.5  
Click Devices and click Browse Devices  
.
For MAC OS X 10.6  
Select your device below SHARED. Skip to step 7.  
5
For MAC OS X 10.4:  
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure  
that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked, and click  
Connect  
.
49  
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh  
       
SOFTWARE SECTION  
INDEX  
printing 38  
scanning 39  
document 14  
fit to page 23  
from Macintosh 44  
from Windows 14  
N-up  
Macintosh 48  
Windows 21  
overlay 25  
A
advanced printing, use 21  
M
B
Macintosh  
driver  
booklet printing 22  
install 42  
poster 24  
PRN 14  
scaling 23  
uninstall 42  
C
printing 44  
canceling  
scan 31  
Color 18  
scanning 49  
setting up the printer 43  
MFP driver, install  
Linux 34  
watermark 24  
print resolution 39  
printer driver, install  
Linux 34  
D
printer properties  
Linux 38  
printer properties, set  
Macintosh 44  
Windows 15, 26  
printer software  
install  
document, print  
Macintosh 44  
N
n-up printing  
Macintosh 48  
Windows 21  
Windows 14  
double-sided printing 23  
Macintosh 42  
G
O
Windows  
Graphics 18  
orientation, print 39  
Windows 16  
overlay  
uninstall  
Graphics properties, set 18  
Macintosh 42  
Windows 12  
printing  
create 25  
delete 25  
print 25  
H
booklets 22  
double-sided 23  
from Linux 38  
help, use 20, 26  
I
P
R
install  
Paper properties, set 16  
paper size, set  
print 39  
resolution  
printing 39  
printer driver  
Macintosh 42  
Windows  
paper source, set 39  
paper tray, set  
copy 27  
paper type, set  
print 39  
poster, print 22  
PostScript driver  
installing 26  
installing  
Linux software 34  
S
scanning  
Linux 39  
SmarThru 29  
TWAIN 30  
L
Linux  
driver, install 34  
printer properties 38  
WIA driver 31  
print  
scanning from Macintosh 49  
50  
setting  
darkness 18  
image mode 18  
true-type option 18  
software  
install  
Macintosh 42  
Windows  
reinstall  
Windows 11  
system requirements  
Macintosh 42  
uninstall  
Macintosh 42  
Windows 12  
status monitor, use 32  
T
TWAIN, scan 30  
U
uninstall, software  
Macintosh 42  
Windows 12  
uninstalling  
MFP driver  
Linux 35  
W
watermark  
create 24  
delete 24  
edit 24  
print 24  
WIA, scan 31  
51  

Toshiba T 720 User Manual
Sterling Power Products Ab12210 User Manual
Sharp Washable Active Carbon Filter Fzn60hfu User Manual
Roberts Gorden Uha Series 300 User Manual
NEC MULTISYNC P552 User Manual
Masterbuilt Slow Smoker User Manual
HP ELITEBOOK 8540P User Manual
HITACHI 43FDX01B User Manual
BLACK DECKER DV1410EL User Manual
ACER ASPIRE R 14 R3 471T User Manual